JP6621723B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Game machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP6621723B2
JP6621723B2 JP2016173807A JP2016173807A JP6621723B2 JP 6621723 B2 JP6621723 B2 JP 6621723B2 JP 2016173807 A JP2016173807 A JP 2016173807A JP 2016173807 A JP2016173807 A JP 2016173807A JP 6621723 B2 JP6621723 B2 JP 6621723B2
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
display
effect
game
special symbol
symbol
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
JP2016173807A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP2018038536A5 (en
JP2018038536A (en
Inventor
征秀 立山
征秀 立山
年弘 新美
年弘 新美
佐々木 和人
和人 佐々木
航 片岡
航 片岡
Original Assignee
京楽産業.株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 京楽産業.株式会社 filed Critical 京楽産業.株式会社
Priority to JP2016173807A priority Critical patent/JP6621723B2/en
Publication of JP2018038536A publication Critical patent/JP2018038536A/en
Publication of JP2018038536A5 publication Critical patent/JP2018038536A5/ja
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP6621723B2 publication Critical patent/JP6621723B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.
  In a conventional gaming machine, when a game ball enters the start area, a random number for whether or not to win a special game is stored as a hold, and if a preset start condition is satisfied, the hold is read out. A special game lottery is performed, and when the special game is won by the special game lottery, the special game is executed. Furthermore, based on the lottery result of the special game, an effect image composed of various moving images and still images is displayed on the effect display unit, or the effect agent device is moved to excite the player's game Has become mainstream (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
  In addition, the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 displays information related to the game on the effect display unit in order to notify the player of information related to the game.
JP 2013-208143 A
  By the way, in the recent gaming machines, the production equipment device is enlarged, and when it is movable, the production display unit may be covered and it may be difficult to visually recognize information about the game. There was a problem that it was difficult to grasp.
  In view of the above-described background, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a game.
In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides an acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on establishment of a start condition, a storage means for storing the determination information acquired by the acquisition means, and a player based on the determination information. A determination means for determining whether or not to perform an advantageous special game, a prior determination means for determining whether or not to perform the special game, and a first symbol variation display on the first display unit based on the result of the determination. First variation display means for performing, second variation display means for performing second symbol variation display on the second display unit so as to correspond to the first symbol variation display, and third display unit based on the result of the determination 3rd fluctuation display means for performing 3 symbol fluctuation display, hold display means for performing hold display according to the number of the determination information stored in the storage means, and display of the hold display based on the result of the prior determination Display change hand that can change the aspect When, wherein the first variable display means are equipped to the main control unit for controlling the progress of the game, the second variable display means, the presentation control means for performing an effect in response to a command from the main control unit Provided, the second symbol variation display is performed in response to reception of a predetermined command transmitted from the main control means when the first symbol variation display is started, and the symbol size in the second symbol variation display is provided. However, the size of the symbol in the third symbol variation display can be changed, and the hold display does not overlap even if the movable effect member is operated, even if the movable effect member is operated. The hold display that is performed in each of the second display area that does not overlap and the third display area that overlaps at least partially when the movable effect member operates, and is displayed in the first display area and the second display area. of Although the display mode does not change, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third display area can be changed. In the first display unit, the lighting positions of a plurality of LEDs are changed to change the first symbol variation display. The second display unit blinks one LED to perform the second symbol variation display, and the change cycle of the lighting position of the LED in the first symbol variation display on the first display unit, 2 The display cycle of the LED in the second symbol variation display on the 2 display section is changed, and the hold display means restarts the power supply that was stopped when the hold display is being performed, and the control state of the game is the power supply When the state before the stop is restored, the hold display is performed earlier in the first display area and the second display area than in the third display area.
  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to grasp information related to a game.
It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the perspective view of the game machine of the state which open | released the glass frame. It is a figure which shows an example of the perspective view of the back surface side of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the display area of a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table of a jackpot lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot game control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot big winning opening / closing control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot big winning opening / closing control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state setting table at the time of jackpot game completion. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol for 1st start openings. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol for 2nd starting openings. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table of the jackpot lottery for 1st start openings. It is a figure which shows an example of the prior determination table of the jackpot lottery for 2nd start openings. (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal symbol hit determination table, (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal symbol stop symbol determination table, and (c) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal symbol variation pattern determination table. (D) is a figure which shows an example of the open mode determination table of a 2nd start opening. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a figure which shows an example of each memory | storage part of a special symbol reservation storage area, (c) is a normal symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c. The figure which shows an example, (d) is a figure which shows an example of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol holding | maintenance storage area. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd start port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the gate detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the common figure normal electric power control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the auxiliary game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the data creation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the output control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the classification of the command transmitted to a production | presentation control board from a main control board. It is a figure which shows the classification of the command transmitted to a production | presentation control board from a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the first half of the effect control part command analysis process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the second half of the effect control part command analysis process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the special figure reservation memory update process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the change effect pattern determination process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation production pattern determination table for production modes 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation production pattern determination table for production modes 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation production pattern determination table for 2nd start openings. It is a figure which shows the notice effect determination process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a notice classification determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol notification mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and effect example 1 of a symbol notice effect. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern and effect example 2 of a symbol notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the music notice notice mode determination table for lose. It is a figure which shows an example of the music notice mode determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the production example 1 displayed on a music preview pattern and an image display part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of an effect displayed on a music preview pattern and an image display part. It is a figure which shows the production example 3 displayed on a music preview pattern and an image display part. It is a figure which shows the example 4 of effects displayed on a music preview pattern and an image display part. It is a figure which shows the example 5 of effects displayed on a music preview pattern and an image display part. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice aspect determination table for lose, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice aspect determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the production example 1 displayed on a step-up notice pattern and an image display part. It is a figure which shows the production example 2 displayed on a step-up notice pattern and an image display part. It is a figure which shows the production example 3 displayed on a step-up notice pattern and an image display part. It is a figure which shows the big hit effect pattern determination process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the data creation process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the data output process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the display result stopped-displayed as a result of a variable display. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. (A) is a figure which shows the example 3 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus, (b) is a 1st game information display apparatus and a 2nd It is a figure which shows the example 4 of a display of the information displayed on a game information display apparatus and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the first half of the example 5 of the display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the second half of the display example 5 of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example 6 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first game information display device. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the first game information display device. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first game information display device. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first game information display device in an exploded state. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a first game information display device. It is a front view of the board | substrate for 1st display. It is a rear view of the 1st display board | substrate. It is a rear view of a cover member. It is the schematic which shows the control structure concerning a 1st game information display apparatus. It is a front view of the periphery of the 1st game information display apparatus concerning a modification. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a coating | coated member and an identification means. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of the first game information display device. It is a front view of the 1st game information display device concerning a modification. It is a rear view of the 1st game information display device concerning a modification. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a first game information display device according to a modified example. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of a state in which a first game information display device according to a modification is disassembled. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 1st game information display apparatus concerning a modification. It is the schematic which shows the control structure concerning the 1st game information display apparatus which concerns on a modification. It is the schematic which shows the control structure concerning the 1st game information display apparatus which concerns on a modification. It is a perspective view from the front of the 2nd game information display device. It is a perspective view from the back of the 2nd game information display device. It is a front view of the 2nd game information display device concerning the modification, and its circumference.
  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 in a state where the glass frame is opened in the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in the display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in the embodiment of the present invention.
  The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 supported to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 supported to be rotatable with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is formed.
  The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is attached to an island facility of a game store (for example, a nail or a stopper). ) Is fixed through.
  The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the first hinge mechanism portion 6. Has been. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 Maintenance can be performed.
  The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. Yes. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.
  An opening (window) 8 that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper portion of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member (a glass plate, an acrylic plate, etc.) 8a is attached so as to close the opening from the rear. The game area 5a is visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.
  Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 including a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), and a game ball paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. The upper receiving tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as, the lower receiving tray 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have not flowed into the upper receiving tray 11 and have flowed into a predetermined ball flow path, and the game balls are fired. And a launching operation device 13 capable of operating for the purpose.
  The audio output device 9 is provided at intervals in two upper portions of the glass frame 4 so as to produce an effect by sound (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. It has become. Also, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8 and produce an effect by illumination by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED).
  The upper tray 11 has a game ball reservoir 11a inclined downward toward the direction of the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.
  In addition, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 functioning as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects, which will be described later, are provided side by side on the center front side portion of the upper tray 11. ing.
  The effect button device 16 moves the effect button 17 in the up and down direction, an effect button 17 capable of performing an operation such as a determination operation, an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 5) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17. An effect button drive motor 17b (see FIG. 5) is provided to allow the player to input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.
  The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (see FIG. 5) that can perform a selection operation and the like, and a cross key detection switch 19a that is connected to the cross key 19 and detects an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 5) is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.
  In addition, a lending / returning operation unit 20 that can perform a lending operation for game balls and a return operation for a storage medium such as a card that stores the balance is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11. When a lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, a game ball is lent by subtracting the remaining amount of a storage medium received by a ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine, When a return button (not shown) of the lending return operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).
  Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball channel (not shown) for guiding game balls that cannot enter the upper tray 11 to the lower tray 12 is formed. Further, a tray full detection switch 32a for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower tray 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the fullness of the lower tray 12 is detected by the tray full detection switch 32a. During this time, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100 described later is stopped.
  The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects that a player's hand touches the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 5) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) including a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 are provided. When it is detected by the touch sensor 15a that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to send out the game balls one by one.
  The game board mounting frame 3 has a game board mounting part 25 for mounting a plate member constituting the game board 5, a game ball launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, and a game board mounting. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an open detection switch 31a for detecting the opening of the glass frame 4 are provided.
  The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape having a front opening at a substantial center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3 and can store the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 are located behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.
  The game ball launching device 26 includes a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the launching member 28, and a launching member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. A launch rail 29 that rises upward and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a launch position that is the lower end of the launch rail 29 are provided. When the game ball A delivered by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member 28.
  The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.
  A partition member comprising a curved inner rail 35 and a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35 is provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the substantially circular game is provided by the partition member. Region 5a is formed. A shooting ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball fired by the game ball launching device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, a guide member 37 for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a is provided at the lower right portion of the game area 5a, and the game ball that has flowed down is played at the most downstream portion of the game area 5a. An out port 39 is formed to guide the outside of the area (the recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).
  Near the center of the game area 5a, a so-called center case is provided with a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that restricts the entry of the game ball into the interior, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5 a into the interior of the decoration frame 40 is provided on the side of the decoration frame 40, and the warp device 41 is introduced below the decoration frame 40. A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling the game ball and flowing down below the decorative frame 40.
  Below the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always win (win) are provided at intervals. When the game balls won (entered) are detected by the general prize opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out as a ball.
  A game gate 44 through which a game ball can pass is provided in the left area (first flow area) and the right area (second flow area) of the game area 5a. When a ball is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed. The normal symbol winning lottery will be described later.
  A first start opening 45 is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42. The first start opening 45 is a place where a game ball can always win (enter). When the played game balls are detected by the first start port detection switch 45a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are paid out as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.
  Directly under the first starting opening 45, the game ball is in a closed state (basic form) where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entry) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the fact that a lottery was won for a normal symbol). Is provided with a variable starting portion 46 that can be converted into an open state (special mode) that allows or is easily won.
  The variable starter 46 includes a second start port 47 through which a game ball can win (enter), and a second start port detection switch 47a that detects a game ball winning (entry) to the second start port 47. A movable member 48 that converts (variates) the second start port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b for opening / closing the movable member 48 are provided. When the second start port 47 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the second start port 47 is open, the game ball wins ( Is possible or easy.
  When a game ball that has won (entered) the second start port 47 is detected by the second start port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are supplied to the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). ) Will be paid out as prize balls. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a big win lottery of a second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.
  A closed state above the guiding member 37 and downstream of the right-hand general-purpose gate 44 is that it is impossible to win a game ball (win) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the winning of a special symbol jackpot lottery). There is provided a variable winning portion 49 that is converted from the (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (pick up).
  The variable winning section 49 includes a large winning opening 50 through which a game ball can be won (entered), a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning (entering) of the game ball into the large winning opening 50, An open / close member 51 that converts (variably) the special winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the open / close member 51 are provided. When the grand prize opening 50 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the big prize opening 50 is in the open state, the game ball is won (winning) ) Is possible or easy.
  Further, when the game balls that have won (entered) the big prize opening 50 are detected by the big prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are obtained from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out as a prize ball.
  The first start port 45 can receive a game ball that has passed through the left side area (first flow area) of the game area 5a, but the game ball that has passed through the right area (second flow area) of the game area 5a. Can not enter the ball. On the other hand, the second starting port 47 can enter a game ball that has passed through either the left region or the right region of the game area 5a, but the game ball that has passed through the right area of the game region 5a is guided by the guide member 37. Since it is guided to the second start opening 47, it is easier to enter the second start opening 47 than the game ball passing through the left area of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state to be described later, it is better to fire the game ball (so-called right-handed) toward the right area of the game area 5a. In addition, game balls that have passed through the right area of the game area 5a can enter the grand prize winning opening 50, but game balls that have passed through the left area of the game area 5a cannot enter. Yes. In other words, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, and the big winning port 50 can play game balls separately.
  On the back side of the game board 5, there is a collective flow path (not shown) that receives and collects the game balls won in the general winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, and the big winning port 50. A winning confirmation detection switch 52a for detecting a game ball flowing down the collective flow path is provided at a lower end portion of the collective flow path. This winning confirmation detection switch 52a detects again the game ball detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a. It is used to determine whether or not the winning is appropriate.
  On the lower left side outside the game area 5a, a first special symbol first indicator 60, a second special symbol first indicator 61, a normal symbol first indicator 62, a first special symbol hold first indicator 63, The second special symbol hold first display 64, the normal symbol hold first display 65, the round number display 66 for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, the jackpot state (special game) Right-handed first display 67 that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the right area of the gaming area 5a (so-called right-handed) during the short-time gaming state described later, and when power is restored A high-probability gaming state display 68 that displays a high-probability gaming state if it is in a high-probability gaming state, which will be described later, and a time-short gaming state if it is in a short-time gaming state when power is restored. From short-time game status indicator 69 The first game information display unit 59 is provided that.
  The first special symbol first indicator 60 is a variable for displaying (notifying) the result of the big special lottery drawing of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the first start opening 45. The second special symbol first indicator 61 displays the result of the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the second starting port 47 (notification) ), And the normal symbol first indicator 62 displays (informs) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) the normal symbol gate 44. ).
  The jackpot lottery for the first special symbol means that when a game ball wins (wins) at the first start opening 45, a random number value for jackpot symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number for jackpot symbol determination and the jackpot determination value are obtained. This is equivalent to determining whether or not it is a “big hit”. When the first special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the first special symbol first display 60 displays a variation of the first special symbol, and a stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result after a predetermined time has elapsed. Is done. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.
  The jackpot lottery for the second special symbol means that when a game ball wins (wins) the second starting port 47, a jackpot symbol determination random number value is acquired, and the acquired jackpot symbol determination random number value and the jackpot determination value are obtained. This is equivalent to determining whether or not it is a “big hit”. In addition, when the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol first indicator 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol indicating the lottery result after a predetermined time has elapsed is displayed. Is done. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.
  The first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicator in the variation display of each special symbol have a predetermined interval or order. Flashes. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, one or a plurality of LEDs are turned on in a mode (a mode indicating the type of special symbol) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery. That is, the type of jackpot, which will be described later, can be discriminated by the lighting state of the LEDs of the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61.
  In the present embodiment, the “big hit” means a state in which the right to execute the big win state (special game state) is acquired in the big special lottery drawing of the first special symbol or the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol. The “hit state (special game state)” refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).
  In addition, although the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 50 in each round game are determined in advance, a predetermined number of game balls can be placed in the big prize opening 50 even before reaching the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time. When (for example, 9) wins (wins), one round game is completed. That is, the “hit game (special game state)” is a game state that is advantageous to a player who can easily win a prize ball. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot states (special game states) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.
  The normal symbol winning lottery means that when a game ball passes through the general gate 44, a winning symbol determining random value is obtained, and the acquired winning symbol determining random number value is compared with the winning determining value. This corresponds to determining whether or not there is. When the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the normal symbol variation display is performed on the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped after a predetermined time. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.
  The normal symbol first display 62 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at a predetermined interval or order in the normal symbol variation display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, one or a plurality of LEDs are lit in a mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (a mode indicating the type of the normal symbol). That is, the hit type described later can be determined by the lighting state of the LED of the normal symbol first display 62. In addition, you may comprise the normal symbol 1st indicator 62 by one LED.
  In the present embodiment, “winning” means a state in which a right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a normal symbol winning lottery. The “winning state (auxiliary game)” refers to a gaming state in which the second start port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.
  In addition, although the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the hit state (auxiliary game) are determined in advance, even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached, When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) wins (wins), the winning state (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the “hit state (auxiliary game)” is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easily executed (start condition is easily established). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hit states (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.
  The first special symbol holding first display 63 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the first special symbol jackpot lottery (first special symbol) stored when a game ball wins (enters) the first start opening 45. This is for displaying the number of rights (first hold) for performing symbol change display, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first hold. In addition, although the maximum number of the first hold is four, it may be less than or more than four.
  When there is one first hold, the LED on the left side of the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 is lit, and when there are two first holds, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63. The two LEDs turn on. In addition, when there are three first holds, the left LED of the first special symbol hold first display 63 blinks and the right LED is lit, and when there are four first holds, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 flashes. Two LEDs of the symbol holding first display 63 blink.
  The second special symbol hold first indicator 64 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot lottery (second special symbol) stored when a game ball wins (enters) the second starting port 47. This is for displaying the number of rights (second hold) for performing symbol change display, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second holds. Note that the maximum number of second suspensions is four, but it may be less or more than four.
  When there is one second hold, the LED on the left side of the second special symbol hold first indicator 64 is lit, and when there are two second holds, the second special symbol hold first indicator 64. The two LEDs turn on. Further, when there are three second holds, the left LED of the second special symbol hold first indicator 64 blinks and the right LED is lit. When there are four second holds, the second special symbol hold first display 64 is turned on. Two LEDs of the symbol holding first display 64 blink.
  In the following description, the term “first hold number” may be expressed as “first hold number” and the term “second hold number” as “second hold number”.
  The normal symbol holding first display 65 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and performs a lottery drawing (normal symbol variation display) of a normal symbol stored when a game ball wins (enters) the normal symbol gate 44. This is for displaying the number of rights (general map hold), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of general map hold. In addition, although the maximum number of ordinary map holds is four, it may be less than or more than four.
  In addition, when there is one common symbol hold, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 is lit, and when there are two common symbol hold, two LEDs of the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 Lights up. Further, when there are three common symbol holds, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold first display 65 flashes and the right LED lights up. When there are four common symbol holds, the normal symbol hold first The two LEDs on the display 65 flash.
  In the following description, the phrase “the number of ordinary maps reserved” may be expressed as “the number of ordinary maps reserved”.
  In addition, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 and / or the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 can be comprised also by 7 segment LED. For example, if a special symbol jackpot lottery is won, “7” is stopped and “−” is stopped if it is lost. It is recommended to repeat “ It should be noted that since the change display of the last change display is displayed at the time of starting the change display of the special symbol, it is easy to grasp that the change display is started by starting from turning off the LED.
  The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big hit state (special game state) occurs, and in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds at the start of the big hit game Is started, the LED is continuously turned on during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is a jackpot game with 8 rounds, only the fourth LED from the left is lit, and if the number of rounds is a jackpot game with 15 rounds, the 4th to 7th LEDs from the left are lit. .
The right-handed first display 67 is composed of one LED, and emits a game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a in the big hit state (special game state) and in the short-time game state (so-called right) The LED is lit during a big hit state (special game state) and a short-time game state.
The right-handed first display 67 starts lighting the LED at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game, and continues to light the LED during the jackpot game. When the transition is made after the game is over, the LED is turned off when the short game state is over. In addition, if the jackpot is won during the short game state at that time, the LED is continuously turned on. Further, if the game does not shift to the short-time game state after the jackpot game, the LED is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, when the LED of the right-handed first display 67 starts lighting once, the LED is continuously lit until the gaming state to be right-handed (special gaming state, short-time gaming state) is completed.
The high-probability gaming state indicator 68 is composed of one LED and is used to display a high-probability gaming state when the power is restored. When the power is restored, the high-probability gaming state is displayed. If so, the LED lights up (so-called morning lamp).
The high-probability gaming state indicator 68 starts LED lighting if the gaming state when the power is restored is the high-probability gaming state, and continues the LED lighting display during the high-probability gaming state. When the high probability gaming state ends, the LED is turned off.
The short-time gaming state indicator 69 is composed of one LED, and is used to display that the short-time gaming state is present when the power is restored. The LED lights up (so-called morning lamp).
The short-time gaming state indicator 69 starts lighting the LED if the gaming state when the power is restored is the short-time gaming state, and continues to light the LED during the short-time gaming state. When is finished, the LED is turned off.
  On the lower left game board 5 inside the game area 5a, a first special symbol second display 80, a second special symbol second display 81, a normal symbol second display 82, a first special symbol hold second 2 indicator 83, second special symbol hold second indicator 84, normal symbol hold second indicator 85, and the right to urge the player to launch a game ball toward the right area of game area 5a (so-called right-handed) A second game information display device 79 including a second hitting display 87 is provided.
The second game information display device 79 has a first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), which will be described later, as compared to the first game information display device 59 provided outside the game area 5a. ). As described above, the second game information display device 79 is provided closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) than the first game information display device 59. The second game information display device 79 is easier to recognize than the first game information display device 59.
The upper part of the second game information display device 79 provided in the game area 5a also serves as a passage path for game balls flowing down the game area 5a. As described above, by providing the second game information display device 79 at a position where the passing path of the game ball is formed, the space is effectively used and the position is easily recognized by the player.
  The first special symbol second indicator 80 is a variable for displaying (notifying) the result of the big special lottery drawing of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the first start opening 45. The second special symbol second indicator 81 displays the result of the big special lottery drawing of the second special symbol which is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the second starting port 47 (notification) ), And the normal symbol second indicator 82 displays (notifies the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the ordinary gate 44. ).
  Each of the first special symbol second indicator 80 or the second special symbol second indicator 81 is constituted by one LED, and the LED of the corresponding indicator blinks at a predetermined interval in the variation display of each special symbol. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is lit in a mode (a jackpot mode or a lost mode) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery. The first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is displayed on the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 to be described later. Since it is the fourth effect symbol following the symbol, the second effect symbol displayed in the center area, and the third effect symbol displayed in the right area, it may be referred to as the fourth symbol.
  Here, the first special symbol second display 80 will be described in detail. The effect control board 130 receives a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and will be described later on the basis that the special symbol fluctuation display data is set. In step S1500, display control data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. As a result, the first special symbol second indicator 80 starts to fluctuate (flash), and the first special symbol is displayed. Based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variable display of the symbols is stopped and the special symbol stop display data is set, in step S1500 described later. Display control data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. Special symbol fluctuation of the second display 80 (flashing) is stopped (turned on or off).
The display mode of the first special symbol second indicator 80 is as follows.
(1) The LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80 starts blinking along with the start of the change of the first special symbol, and the LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80 is changed during the variation of the first special symbol. Continues to flash.
(2) When the first special symbol is stopped when winning the jackpot lottery (the jackpot), the LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80 is lit, and the next variable display is started after the jackpot game ends. The lighting of the LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80 is continued until this time.
(3) When the special symbol at the time of loss (losing) in the jackpot lottery is stopped, the LED of the first special symbol second indicator 80 is extinguished, and the first special symbol second until the next variation display is started. The LED of the display device 80 continues to be turned off.
  Note that the timing of the start of fluctuation and the timing of the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol second display 80 are the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later. It is synchronized with the timing and the fluctuation stop timing.
  Whether the first special symbol second indicator 80 and the second special symbol second indicator 81 display a variable display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol. Since the display timing, display mode, and the like are the same, the description of the second special symbol second display 81 is omitted. The timing of the start of change and the timing of change stop of the second special symbol second display 81 are the start of variation of the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later. It is synchronized with the timing and the fluctuation stop timing.
  The first special symbol second indicator 80 and / or the second special symbol second indicator 81 displays only whether or not the jackpot lottery results as a result of the jackpot lottery when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Like the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61, it may be constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the type of special symbol may be displayed as a result of the big hit lottery.
  The normal symbol second display 82 is constituted by one LED, and the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in the normal symbol variation display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on or off in a mode (a winning mode or a lost mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.
  Specifically, the effect control board 130 has received the normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the normal symbol fluctuation display is started, and the normal symbol fluctuation display data is set. Based on this, display control data is created in step S1500, which will be described later, and the generated display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. As a result, the fluctuation (flashing) of the normal symbol second display 82 starts and the normal symbol is displayed. Based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variable display is stopped and the normal symbol stop display data is set, the display control is performed in step S1500 described later. Data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. Pattern variations of the second display 82 (flashing) is stopped (turned on or off).
The display mode of the normal symbol second display 82 is as follows.
(1) The LED of the normal symbol second indicator 82 starts blinking with the start of the change of the normal symbol, and the LED of the normal symbol second indicator 82 continues to blink during the variation of the normal symbol.
(2) When the normal symbol at the time of winning (winning) the winning lottery is stopped, the LED of the normal symbol second indicator 82 is lit, and after the winning game ends, the normal symbol number 1 is displayed. The LED of 2 indicator 82 continues lighting.
(3) When the normal symbol is stopped when the winning lottery is lost (losing), the LED of the normal symbol second indicator 82 is turned off, and the normal symbol second indicator 82 is turned on until the next variation display is started. The LED continues to turn off.
  The normal symbol second display 82 displays only whether or not the winning symbol as a result of the winning lottery is displayed when the normal symbol is stopped. However, as with the normal symbol first indicator 62, a plurality of LEDs are displayed. The type of normal symbol may be displayed as a result of the jackpot lottery.
  The first special symbol hold second indicator 83 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs similarly to the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 described above, and when the game ball wins (enters) the first start opening 45. In order to display the number of rights (first hold) for performing a jackpot lottery (change display of the first special symbol) of the first special symbol stored in Lights up or flashes. In addition, although the maximum number of the first hold is four, it may be less than or more than four.
  Specifically, based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol memory designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of first hold increases or decreases, and the first special symbol hold display data is set. Display control data is created in step S1500, which will be described later, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the first special symbol hold second display 83 is displayed (lighted, blinking, or turned off). Is done.
When there is one first hold, the LED on the left side of the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 is lit, and when there are two first holds, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83. The two LEDs turn on. In addition, when there are three first holds, the left LED of the first special symbol hold second display 83 blinks and the right LED is lit, and when there are four first holds, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 flashes. Two LEDs of the symbol hold second display 83 blink.
Further, the display (lighting and blinking) timing and the erasing (light-off) timing of the first special symbol hold second display 83 are the first hold icons H11 to H1 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later. It is synchronized with the display timing and the erasing timing of H14, and is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the first hold number display in the first hold number display area SH1 described later.
  The second special symbol hold second indicator 84 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs similarly to the above-mentioned second special symbol hold first indicator 64, and when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47 In order to display the number of rights (second hold) for performing the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) stored in Lights up or flashes. Note that the maximum number of second suspensions is four, but it may be less or more than four.
  Specifically, based on the fact that the special control memory designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the second reserved number increases or decreases is received by the effect control board 130 and the second special symbol hold display data is set. The display control data is created in step S1500, which will be described later, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the second special symbol hold second display 84 is displayed (lighted, blinking, or turned off). Is done.
In addition, when there is one second hold, the LED on the left side of the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 is lit, and when there are two second holds, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84. The two LEDs turn on. When there are three second holds, the left LED of the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 blinks and the right LED is lit. When there are four second holds, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 is turned on. Two LEDs of the symbol holding second display 84 blink.
In addition, the display (lighting and blinking) timing and the erasing (lighting off) timing of the second special symbol hold second display 84 are the second hold icons H21 to H1 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later. The timing is synchronized with the display timing and the erasing timing of H24, and is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the second hold number display displayed in the second hold number display area SH2 described later.
  The normal symbol holding second display 85 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs in the same manner as the normal symbol first display described above, and the normal symbol stored when the game ball is won (entered) in the general gate 44. This is for displaying the number of rights (common figure hold) for performing a winning lottery (ordinary symbol variation display), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of common figure hold. In addition, although the maximum number of ordinary map holds is four, it may be less than or more than four.
  More specifically, the effect control board 130 receives a normal symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of normal figure holds increases or decreases, and the normal symbol hold display data is set, which will be described later. In step S1500, display control data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the normal symbol hold second display 85 is displayed (lighted, blinked, or turned off).
  In addition, when there is one common symbol hold, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 is lit, and when there are two general symbol hold, two LEDs of the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 Lights up. Further, when there are three common symbol holds, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 blinks and the right LED is lit, and when there are four common symbol holds, the normal symbol hold second The two LEDs on the display 85 flash.
  The right-handed second display 87 is composed of one LED similarly to the right-handed first display 67 described above, and is in the right area of the gaming area 5a during the big hit state (special gaming state) and during the short-time gaming state. Is intended to display (right-handed display) prompting the player to launch a game ball toward the right (so-called right-handed), and the LED is lit during the big hit state (special game state) and during the short-time game state. .
  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives an opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the jackpot game (opening) is started, and will be described later based on the right-handed display data being set. In step S1500, display control data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, whereby display (lighting) of the right-handed second display 87 is started and the gaming state is changed. When the effect control board 130 receives a gaming state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 and the gaming state is not a jackpot gaming state or a short-time gaming state, right-handed erasure data is set, and in step S1500 to be described later Display control data is created, and the created display control data is received in step S1600, which will be described later. By output, right-handed display of the second display unit 87 (lighting) is completed (off).
The right-handed second display 87 starts lighting the LED at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game, and continues to light the LED during the jackpot game. When the transition is made after the game is over, the LED is turned off when the short game state is over. In addition, if the jackpot is won during the short game state at that time, the LED is continuously turned on. Further, if the game does not shift to the short-time game state after the jackpot game, the LED is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, once the LED of the right-handed first display 67 starts to be turned on, the lighting is continued until the gaming state to be right-handed (special gaming state, short-time gaming state) is completed.
The lighting timing of the right-handed second display 87 is synchronized with the display timing of the image G10 “right-handed →→” displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later.
Further, the right-handed second display 87 is marked as “right-handed” as shown in FIG. 1, and the right-handed display is recognized by the player more than the right-handed first display 67 with nothing written. It is a mode that is easy to do.
  A first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the back of the effect space 40a, and a second image display device (sub liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided below the effect space 40a. 71 is provided, and a movable effect member 73 simulating a character's face is provided above the effect space 40a.
  The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. Examples of the effect display include a customer waiting demonstration effect that is performed when the special symbol variation display is not performed, and a variation display of the effect symbol 70a that is performed when the special symbol variation display is performed. It is also possible to replace the effect design with the identification information.
  As shown in FIG. 4, the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is formed with an effect symbol display area including a left area, a center area, and a right area. The displayed effect symbol 70a (first effect symbol, second effect symbol, third effect symbol) is scrolled in the vertical direction (from the top to the bottom in this embodiment), thereby changing the effect symbol 70a.
  The effect symbol 70a is composed of symbols indicating numbers from “1” to “9”, for example, and is executed by the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61. Corresponding to the symbol display, the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner. That is, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the variation display of the special symbol. In addition to the symbols indicating numerals, symbols indicating alphabets such as “A” to “F” may be provided as the effect symbols 70a.
  Specifically, when the special symbol fluctuation display is started, the special control fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received by the effect control board 130 and determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. A variation effect pattern designation command is set, and is output by the image control unit 140 in a data output process in step S1600, which will be described later, whereby a variation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed.
In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The big hit mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same design symbols such as “777” or a regular design combination such as “753”, and the loss mode is any other mode. is there. The variation display mode of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls left and right, or one that rotates (autorotates) on the spot.
  Specifically, when the special symbol variation display is stopped, the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the stop designation command is set, and the data of step S1600 described later In the output processing, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed by being transmitted to the image control unit 140.
  Further, during the dynamic display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device according to the result of the big hit lottery. By displaying on 71 (sub liquid crystal), the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit (special game state) is enhanced.
  Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 has a number of first symbols corresponding to the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) that is the current number of first reservations. First hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 for displaying the hold icons H11 to H14, and the number of second hold icons H21 to H21 corresponding to the number of second special symbol holds (U2) that is the current number of second holds. Second variation icon display area 70C1 to 70C4 for displaying H24, and the variation icon display for displaying the variation icon TH corresponding to (related to) the variation display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) being executed Region 70D is formed.
  The first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 are partitioned in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, and a fourth display unit 70B4 from the side close to the variable icon display region 70D. The number of first hold icons H11 to H14 corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) is displayed on each display unit 70B1 to 70B4. That is, the number of the first holding icons H11 to H14 is also increased or decreased in correspondence with the increase or decrease of the first special symbol holding number (U1).
  A first hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 to indicate the first hold on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the first special symbol is displayed second on the second display unit 70B2. The first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold on which the variable display is executed is displayed, and the first display showing the first hold on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third is displayed on the third display unit 70B3. The hold icon H13 is displayed, and the first hold icon H14 indicating the first hold on which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4.
  Specifically, the production control board 130 receives the first start winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game ball wins the first starting opening 45, and based on the first start winning designation command. The determined hold icon display designation command is set, and is output by the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later, whereby the first hold icons H11 to H14 are newly displayed. In addition, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure variation pattern transmitted at the start of the first special symbol variation, and the hold icon change designation command is set. In the data output processing in step S1600 described later, the image control unit 140 By outputting, the display of the first hold icons H11 to H14 is updated and displayed.
  The second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 are partitioned in the form of the first display part 70C1, the second display part 70C2, the third display part 70C3, and the fourth display part 70C4 from the side close to the variable icon display area 70D. The number of second hold icons H21 to H22 corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) is displayed on each display unit 70C1 to 70C4. That is, the number of the second hold icons H21 to H24 is also increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease of the second special symbol hold number (U2).
  The first display unit 70C1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold on which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first. The second display unit 70C2 displays the second special symbol second. The second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold on which the variable display is executed is displayed, and the second display indicating the second hold on which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third is displayed on the third display unit 70C3. The hold icon H23 is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70C4 displays a second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold in which the second special symbol variable display is executed fourth.
  Specifically, the production control board 130 receives the second start winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game ball wins the second starting opening 47, and based on the second start winning designation command. The determined hold icon display designation command is set, and is output by the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later, whereby the second hold icons H21 to H24 are newly displayed. In addition, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure variation pattern transmitted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol, the hold icon change designation command is set, and in the data output processing of step S1600 described later, the image control unit 140 By outputting, the display of the second hold icons H21 to H24 is updated and displayed.
  The variation icon display area 70D corresponds to the start of the variation display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a). The first suspension icon H11 or the second suspension displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first suspension icon display region. When the second hold icon H21 displayed on the first display portion 70C1 of the icon display area moves (shifts), the variation icon TH is displayed, and at the end of the variation display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a). The variation icon TH disappears (erases). Note that the variation icon TH may be erased during the variation display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a).
  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure variation pattern transmitted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hold icon change designation command is set, and the data output in step S1600 described later In the processing, the fluctuation icon TH is displayed by being output by the image control unit 140.
  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 includes a first special symbol display area DZ1 for variably displaying the first special symbol (first specific identification information). , A second special symbol display area DZ2 for variably displaying the second special symbol (second specific identification information), and a first reserved number for simply displaying the first special symbol reservation number (U1) with arithmetic numbers A display area SH1 and a second reserved number display area SH2 for simply displaying the second special symbol reserved number (U2) with arithmetic numbers are formed. The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be referred to as a fourth symbol, similar to the first special symbol second indicator 80 and the second special symbol second indicator 81. That is, there are two fourth symbols: the first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol.
  In the first special symbol display area DZ1, the variable display of the first special symbol starts corresponding to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol corresponds to the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The change display of is stopped.
  Specifically, when the special symbol variation display is started, the special control variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received by the effect control board 130, and the special symbol variation display designation command is set. In the data output process of step S1600, the first special symbol variation display is performed by being output by the image control unit 140, and is transmitted from the main control board 110 when the special symbol variation display is stopped. The effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the stop designation command is set, and is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later, whereby the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Is called. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol is determined by the player according to the variable state of the first special symbol. Is notified (suggested).
  In the second special symbol display area DZ2, the variable display of the second special symbol is started in response to the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol in response to the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol. The change display of is stopped.
  Specifically, when the special symbol variation display is started, the special control variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received by the effect control board 130, and the special symbol variation display designation command is set. In the data output process of step S1600, the second special symbol variation display is performed by being output by the image control unit 140, and is transmitted from the main control board 110 when the special symbol variation display is stopped. The effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the stop designation command is set, and is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later, whereby the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Is called. That is, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, and the execution state of the variation display of the second special symbol depends on the variation state of the second special symbol. Is notified (suggested).
The first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are composed of, for example, a “O” symbol indicating a jackpot mode, an “X” symbol indicating a loss mode, and the like. During display, “○” symbol and “×” symbol are displayed in order, and when special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, “○” symbol is stopped and displayed. When the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, it is stopped and displayed as a “x” symbol. Further, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed continues until the next special symbol change is started.
In FIGS. 69 to 74 to be described later, when the special symbols (the first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information)) are being variably displayed, “−” "" To indicate that it is fluctuating.
  The first reserved number display area SH1 displays a numerical value from “0” to “4” indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1). The first special symbol reserved number (U1) ) The numerical value displayed changes according to the increase or decrease.
  The second reserved number display area SH2 displays a numerical value from “0” to “4” indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2). The second special symbol reserved number (U2) ) The numerical value displayed changes according to the increase or decrease.
  Note that the first hold number display area SH1, the second hold number display area SH2, and the arithmetic numbers displayed in these areas are larger than the hold icon and the fluctuation icon, but the hold icon and the fluctuation The icon may be smaller than the hold icon or the fluctuation icon so that the icon is easier to visually recognize (conspicuous). Also, the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 and the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 and the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 and the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 and the special symbol hold so that the visibility is different from the LEDs of the special symbol hold second display 83, 84. It may be smaller or larger than the LEDs of the second indicators 83 and 84.
  Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the first hold number or the second hold number increases or decreases, and the special symbol hold number display designation command is set. In the data output process in step S1600, which will be described later, the hold displayed in the hold number display area (the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) by being output by the image control unit 140. The number (first hold number, second hold number) display is updated.
  In the present embodiment, a hold icon (first hold icons H11 to H14, second hold icons H21 to H24), the change icon TH, and the number of holds are displayed on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The first hold number display, the second hold number display) and the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed, but are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). You may do it.
  The movable effect member 73 can perform a light emission effect by emitting light by a panel illumination device 74 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.), and a panel drive device 75 configured by a solenoid, a motor, or the like. It is possible to perform a moving effect by moving up and down.
  Specifically, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the effect position is emitted from a predetermined light emission color or positioned downward from the standby position positioned above. The light emission effect and the movement effect are performed by moving to. In addition, you may comprise so that a light emission effect and a movement effect may be performed by operation of the effect button 17. FIG.
  On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a main control device 110A having a main control board 110 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and a game ball according to a payout control command from the main control board 110. A payout control device 120A having a payout control board 120 for controlling the payout device 100; an effect control device 130A having an effect control board 130 for controlling the effect according to the effect control command from the main control board 110; A power supply device 180A incorporating a power supply board 180 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices, and a game information output terminal plate 90 for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the gaming machine are provided.
(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in the embodiment of the present invention.
  The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during the arithmetic processing, and an input for main control. Port and output port. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b, performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c, and controls the controlled device or the result of the arithmetic processing. A predetermined command based on this is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.
  Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. A command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130.
  The input port of the main control board 110 includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, and a winning confirmation detection switch 52a. The magnetic detection switch 53a, the radio wave detection switch 54a, the payout control board 120, and the like are connected. Detection signals and the like from various detection switches are input to the main control board 110 through the input port, and control processing according to the detection signals is performed.
  The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second start opening / closing solenoid 48b, a prize winning opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol first display 60, a second special symbol first display 61, and a normal symbol first display. 62, first special symbol hold first indicator 63, second special symbol hold first indicator 64, normal symbol hold first indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed first indicator 67, high probability A game status display 68, a time-saving game status display 69, and a game information output terminal board 90 are connected. Via the output port, drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, game information notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer), etc. Is output.
  The payout control board 120 controls the payout of the game ball and the launch of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launching device 26 to control the release of the game ball.
  The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during the calculation processing, an input port and an output port for payout control, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c, so that the game ball payout device 100 Or a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, or the like.
  To the input port of the payout control unit 121, an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and the like are connected.
  When an opening detection signal indicating that the glass frame 4 is opened is input from the opening detection switch 31a, the payout control unit 121 transmits a frame opening error designation command to the effect control board 130, and the opening detection signal When the input stops, a frame opening error release designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. In the effect control board 130, when the frame opening error designation command is received, the opening error notification is performed, and when the frame opening error release designation command is received, the opening error notification is terminated.
  A payout motor 100 b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to an output port of the payout control unit 121. When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout motor 100b is driven to perform a control for paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and a payout ball detection switch 100a discharges a predetermined number of game balls. When it is detected, the control for paying out the game ball is ended.
  The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like (not shown). The touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and the ball feed solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122.
  When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 by a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the firing control unit 122 permits energization to the firing solenoid 28b and detects from the firing volume 15b. When it is detected that the turning angle of the launching handle 15 has been changed by the signal, the launching solenoid 28b is driven so that the launching intensity is in accordance with the turning angle of the launching handle 15, and the game ball is launched. Yes.
  The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft, and the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A by rotating the rotating shaft. . Since the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, the game ball is fired for 1 minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.
  The effect control board 130 receives a command from the main control board 110 and controls an effect related to the game. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during the arithmetic processing, and a first image display device (main liquid crystal display). ) 70 and the image control unit 140 for controlling the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the sound control unit 150 for controlling the audio output device (speaker) 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. A lamp control unit 160, a drive control unit 170 that controls the effect button drive motor 17b and the panel drive device 75, and an input port and an output port for effect control are provided.
  The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, performs the processing related to the presentation while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, and receives the command received from the main control board 110. Various control units (image control unit 140, sound control unit 150, lamp control unit 160, drive control unit 170) execute various effects in response to input signals from the button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a. Control to output (output data and commands).
  An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect corresponding to the detection signal is performed.
  The output port of the production control board 130 includes a first special symbol second indicator 80, a second special symbol second indicator 81, a normal symbol second indicator 82, a first special symbol hold second indicator 83, a second Two special symbol hold second indicators 84, a normal symbol hold second indicator 85, and a right-handed second indicator 87 are connected. Display control signals for controlling various displays are output via the output port.
  The image control unit 140 receives the command from the effect control unit 130m and performs control to display a predetermined image on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. The image control unit 140 includes a display control CPU 140a that performs arithmetic processing, a display control ROM 140b that stores a display control program, a display control RAM 140c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a drawing that includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) as an image processor. A control unit 141, a CGROM 142 storing image data and the like, a VRAM 143 having a frame buffer and the like for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data, and an output port are provided.
  The display control CPU 140a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the display control program stored in the display control ROM 140b, and utilizes the display control RAM 140c to make the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device. Control for displaying an image on (sub liquid crystal) 71 is performed.
  The display control ROM 140b includes a mask ROM, a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, and animation scene information. Etc. are stored.
  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 include various information such as a duty ratio that is a luminance parameter.
  A drawing control unit (VDP) 141 is connected to the CGROM 142 in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is a source of a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on a command and image data from the display control CPU 140a. To do. The image data includes images (frames) to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, for example, an effect symbol image, a landscape image constituting a background of the effect symbol, a character This is material data representing individual images such as images and serif images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.
  The CGROM 142 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like. The CGROM 142 compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies, etc.) composed of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 142 is read out in units of image data by a drawing control unit (VDP) 141, and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.
Further, the CGROM 142 stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 142 may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed.
As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.
  The VRAM 143 is configured by an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. The VRAM 143 is a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the display control CPU 140a, and a frame buffer corresponding to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. It has an area etc.
  The frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a “drawing frame buffer” and a “display frame buffer” each time drawing is started.
  For this reason, the drawing control unit (VDP) 141 draws drawing data stored in the CGROM 142 in the “frame buffer for drawing” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 143 based on an instruction (display list) from the display control CPU 140a. Drawing data is read from the “display frame buffer” in the buffer area, a video signal (LVDS signal, RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image data are displayed. The image is output to an image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 to display various images.
  The drawing control unit (VDP) 141 is supplied with an operation clock from a crystal oscillator. By dividing the operation clock, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device ( A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the sub liquid crystal) 71 is generated and output to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71.
  Further, a general-purpose board 72 that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs it between the image control unit 140 and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 for displaying image data. Absorbs the difference in resolution between connecting a 19 inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) and a 17 inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) .
  The sound control unit 150 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image. In accordance with the display on the display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, control is performed to output audio data, music data, and the like from the audio output device 9.
  The lamp control unit 160 is connected to the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, and is based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). A light emission effect is performed by performing lighting control such as turning on, turning off, or blinking the LEDs of the device 10 and the panel lighting device 74.
  The drive control unit 170 is connected to the effect button drive motor 17b and the board drive device 75, and the effect button drive is performed based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a). An operation effect is performed by performing drive control of a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the motor 17b and the panel drive device 75.
  The power supply board 180 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and various electronic components). The power supply board 180 detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and outputs a power failure detection signal 182 to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 183 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 when power is interrupted (power failure).
  The power interruption detection circuit 182 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1 and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, the main CPU 110a whose power interruption detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power interruption detection signal is at a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stop state.
  The backup power supply circuit 183 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine is energized, and the power supply voltage for backup stored in the capacitor when the power interruption (power failure) occurs is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 or the payout control. Supply to the payout RAM 121c of the substrate 120. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is interrupted (power failure), and the game control state is restored to the state before the power failure (power failure) occurs after recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the effect control board 130.
  Although the effect control board 130 (specifically, the effect control unit 130m) and the second game information display device 79 are directly connected via wiring, the effect control board 130 and the second game information display are displayed. A relay board may be provided between the device 79 and the effect control board 130 and the second game information display device 79 may be indirectly connected via the relay board. Further, the second game information display device 79 is not connected to the effect control unit 130m, but is connected to the lamp control unit 160, and the lamp control unit 160 performs the first operation based on instruction information (effect data) from the effect control unit 130m. The two game information display device 79 may be controlled. Further, a relay board may be provided between the lamp control unit 160 and the second game information display device 79.
(Description of gaming state)
Next, the gaming state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are “low probability gaming state” and “high probability gaming state” as the states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and “non-short-time gaming state” as the state relating to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47. And “short-time gaming state”. The states related to the jackpot lottery (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) and the states relating to the movable member 48 (non-short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state) can be associated with each other or can be made independent. . That means
(1) In the case of “low probability gaming state” and “short-time gaming state” (first specific gaming state),
(2) In the case of “low probability gaming state” and “non-temporary gaming state” (normal gaming state),
(3) In the case of “high probability gaming state” and “time saving gaming state” (second specific gaming state),
(4) In the case of “high probability gaming state” and “non-short game state” (third specific gaming state),
Can be provided.
Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is a “low probability gaming state” and is set to a “non-short-time gaming state”. Is referred to as a “normal gaming state”.
  In the present embodiment, the “low probability gaming state” means that the winning probability of jackpot in the jackpot lottery of special symbols performed on the condition that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 For example, it means a gaming state set as low as 1/299. On the other hand, the “high probability gaming state” refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared to the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set to be, for example, 1 / 59.8. . Therefore, in the “high probability gaming state”, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the “low probability gaming state”. Note that the low probability gaming state is changed to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game described later is finished.
  In this embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability gaming state is called “probability jackpot”, and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low probability gaming state is called “ordinary jackpot”.
  In the present embodiment, “non-short-time gaming state” means the average variation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. Is a game state that is set longer than the “short-time game state” and that the opening time of the second start port 47 when winning in the win is easily set. For example, when a game ball passes through the general symbol gate 44, a normal symbol winning lottery is performed, and the normal symbol variation display is performed on the normal symbol first display 62, but the normal symbol variation display is started. From, for example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second start port 47 is controlled to be opened for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the normal symbol stop display. In other words, in the “non-short game state”, if the player hits the right side, the game ball will not win the first start port 45 and the game ball will not easily win the second start port 47. Thus, the player can advance the game more advantageously than the case of making a right-hand hit.
  On the other hand, the “short-time gaming state” means that the average variation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the ordinary gate 44 is used. A gaming state that is set shorter than the “non-short-time gaming state” and is set to be longer than the “non-short-time gaming state”, for example, the opening time of the second start port 47 when winning in the win is 2.5 seconds, for example. Say. Further, in the “non-short-time gaming state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery is set to be low, for example, 1/128, and in the “short-time gaming state”, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example, 127. / 128 is set high. Therefore, in the “short-time gaming state”, when the game ball passes through the normal gate 44 than in the “non-short-time gaming state”, the second start port 47 is more easily controlled to the open mode. As a result, in the “short-time gaming state”, the player can advance the game advantageously without consuming the game ball by making a right strike.
  In the embodiment, the “short time gaming state” is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second start opening 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the “non-short time gaming state”. Has been. However, the “short-time gaming state” may be set so that only one of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second start opening 47, and the normal symbol lottery winning probability is advantageous. Further, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be, for example, 0/128.
  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.
(Special design jackpot lottery determination table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a jackpot determination table. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a jackpot determination table for a first special symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 45, and FIG. 6B shows the second start. It is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the mouth 47. In the tables of FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, the jackpot probabilities are the same.
  As shown in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b), the jackpot determination table includes a probability game state, a jackpot determination acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47. The jackpot determination value for determining the random number for use and the determination result of the jackpot lottery are associated with each other.
  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (a) and FIG. 6 (b), and acquires the current probability gaming state and the acquired jackpot Based on the determination random number value, it is determined whether it is “big hit” or “lost”.
  For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6A, it is determined that two jackpot determination random numbers “7” and “8” are jackpots in the low probability gaming state. Is done. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, ten jackpot determination random numbers from “7” to “16” are determined to be jackpots. If the random number is other than the above, it is determined as “lost”.
  Therefore, since the random number range of the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 598, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/299, and it is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability gaming state. Probability increases by a factor of 5 to 1 / 58.9. In addition, the probability determined to be a big hit is not limited to five times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as three times or ten times.
(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table for determining a special symbol stop symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, FIG. 7 (a) is a special symbol determination table for jackpot that is referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol at the time of winning the jackpot, and FIG. It is a symbol determination table for losing that is sometimes referred to in order to determine a stop symbol of a special symbol.
  As shown in FIG. 7A, in the special symbol determination table for jackpots, when the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 and the type of the start port that the game ball has won. The jackpot symbol determination value for determining the jackpot symbol determination random value to be acquired, the determination result (special symbol type), the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the information indicating the special symbol type The effect designating command transmitted to the control board 130 is associated.
  As shown in FIG. 7B, in the special symbol determination table for losing, when the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 and the type of the start port where the game ball has won, The jackpot symbol determination value for determining the jackpot symbol determination random value to be acquired, the determination result (special symbol type), the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the information indicating the special symbol type The effect designating command transmitted to the control board 130 is associated. It should be noted that a plurality of special symbols and special symbol determination values may be associated with each other so that a plurality of special symbols can be determined even in the case of a loss.
The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7, and determines the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) based on the type of the starting opening where the game ball has won and the random number value for jackpot symbol determination. Will be determined.
Then, at the time of starting the change of the special symbol, an effect designating command as information indicating the type of the special symbol is determined based on the determined special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data). Here, the effect designating command is composed of 2-byte data, and 1-byte MODE data for identifying the control command classification and 1-byte DATA indicating the contents of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. The same applies to a variation pattern designation command described later.
  Here, as will be described later, the type of jackpot game (see FIG. 8) and the game state after the jackpot game end (see FIG. 11) are determined by the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). It can be said that the type of special symbol determines the type of jackpot game and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends.
(Big hit game control table)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of the jackpot state (special game state) when the jackpot lottery is determined as the determination result of the jackpot lottery. In the jackpot game control table, the special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), the opening time of the jackpot state (special game state), the opening designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the opening, and the big prize opening 50 Are associated with the winning opening / closing control table for determining the opening / closing mode, the ending time in the big hit state (special game state), and the ending designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the ending.
  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8, and determines the opening time, the big opening / closing control table, and the ending time based on the special figure stop symbol data. In addition, since the number of rounds in the big win state (special game state) is determined by determining the type of the big prize opening / closing table, FIG. 8 shows the number of rounds in the big win state (special game state), etc. Is supplementarily described.
(Big prize opening / closing control table for jackpot games)
FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing a big prize opening / closing control table that is referred to when a big win is won. The special prize opening / closing control table includes a table number (TBL.No), a round number indicating the number of rounds of the big hit game (special game state), and a special electric power indicating the number of times the special prize opening 50 is opened during one round. The operation number (K), the opening time of the special winning opening 50, and the closing time (interval time) for closing the special winning opening 50 between rounds are associated with each other.
  The main CPU 110a specifies the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the special winning opening 50 with reference to the special winning opening / closing control table shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and based on the first winning opening / closing control table (TBL.No01). The first jackpot game is executed, the second jackpot game is executed based on the second big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No02), and the second big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No03) is used. The third big hit game is executed, the fourth big win game is executed based on the fourth big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No04), and the fifth big win is made based on the fifth big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No05). A game is executed, a sixth jackpot game is executed based on the sixth grand prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No06), and a seventh big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No.06) is executed. Performing a seventh bonus game based on o07).
  According to the first big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 01), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to move the big prize opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a to one round from the first round to the fourth round. The first jackpot game is executed, which is released to 29.5 seconds per round, and from 5 to 8 rounds is released to 0.18 seconds per round.
  However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, one round of game is completed. When the eight-round game ends, the first jackpot game ends. From the 5th round to the 8th round, since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the first big hit game can be said to be a promising big hit game of 4 rounds.
  According to the second winning prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 02), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to change the winning prize opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from the first round to the fourth round and from the sixth round. Up to 8 rounds are opened up to 29.5 seconds per round, and 5 rounds are opened and closed multiple times per round (K = 5). Repeat the closing for 32 seconds, and finally release for 25.0 seconds).
  However, when a prescribed number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the maximum number of times of opening (K), the game of one round is finished. And when the game of 8 rounds is complete | finished, the 2nd big hit game will be complete | finished. It should be noted that since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is long from 1 round to 8 rounds and it is easy to obtain a winning ball, the second big hit game can be said to be a promising big hit game of 8 rounds.
  Note that, in the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game, the open / close mode of the big prize opening 50 is the same until the middle of the fifth round, so it is not possible to grasp which jackpot game is up to the middle. Therefore, in the first jackpot game, a round game in which a prize ball can be obtained during the closing time of 5 to 8 rounds, and in the second jackpot game until the fourth closing time of the big winning opening 50 of 5 rounds. For example, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 executes a promotion effect as to whether or not the increase occurs. Specifically, in the first jackpot game, after executing the promotion failure effect that makes it appear that the increase in the round game in which the prize ball can be acquired in the final stage of the promotion effect has failed, the jackpot game is terminated. In the second jackpot game, after performing the promotion success effect that makes it seem that the round game that can win the prize ball in the final stage of the promotion effect was successful, the fifth round opening of the 50 round winning prize opening 50 is performed. The jackpot game is advanced after the 6th round in which a prize ball can be obtained. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion effect is enhanced.
  According to the third big prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 03), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to change the big prize opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from one round to 15 rounds per round. Open up to 29.5 seconds and run the third jackpot game. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, one round of game is completed. When the 15-round game ends, the third big hit game ends. It should be noted that the third big hit game is substantially a 15-round promising big hit game because the open time of the big winning opening 50 is long from 1 round to 15 rounds and it is easy to obtain a winning ball.
  According to the fourth prize opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 04), the opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a is changed from one round to eight rounds per round. A fourth jackpot game is executed which is released until 0.18 seconds. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, one round of game is completed. And when the game of 8 rounds is complete | finished, the 4th big hit game will be complete | finished. From the 1st round to the 8th round, since the opening time of the big prize opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the fourth big hit game can be said to be a sudden probability change big hit game of 0 rounds.
  According to the fifth prize winning opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 05), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to move the prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from one round to eight rounds. Open up to 29.5 seconds per game and execute the fifth jackpot game. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, one round of game is completed. And when the game of 8 rounds is complete | finished, a 5th big hit game will be complete | finished. It should be noted that since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is long from the first round to the eighth round and it is easy to obtain a winning ball, the fifth big hit game can be said to be a normal big hit game of substantially eight rounds.
  According to the sixth grand prize opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 06), the opening / closing member 51 is operated so that the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a is one round from the first round to the fourth round. A sixth jackpot game is executed in which the game is released up to 29.5 seconds per game and from 5 to 15 rounds up to 0.18 seconds per game round.
  However, if a specified number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses, one round of game is completed. And when the game of 15 rounds is complete | finished, a 6th big hit game will be complete | finished. From the 5th round to the 15th round, since the opening time of the big prize opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, the sixth big hit game can be said to be a promising big hit game of four rounds.
  According to the seventh grand prize opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 07), the opening / closing member 51 is operated, and the grand prize winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a is changed from the first round to the fourth round and from the sixth round. Open up to 29.5 seconds per round up to 15 rounds, and open and close multiple times (K = 12) per round in 5 rounds (the grand prize opening 50 is open for 0.18 seconds and 2 Repeat the closing for 548 seconds, and finally release for 25.0 seconds).
  However, when a prescribed number (9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 50 before the maximum number of times of opening (K), the game of one round is finished. Then, when the 15-round game ends, the seventh big hit game ends. It should be noted that the seventh big hit game is substantially a 15-round probable big hit game because the open time of the big winning opening 50 is long from 1 round to 15 rounds and it is easy to obtain a winning ball.
  Note that in the sixth jackpot game and the seventh jackpot game, the open / close mode of the big winning opening 50 is the same until the middle of the fifth round, so it is impossible to grasp which jackpot game is until the middle.
  Therefore, in the sixth jackpot game, for example, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 executes a promotion effect as to whether or not the number of rounds in which a prize ball can be acquired increases from 5 to 15 rounds, In the seventh jackpot game, for example, the first image shows a promotion effect as to whether or not the number of rounds in which a prize ball can be acquired increases between the first opening of the fifth round winning opening 50 and the eleventh closing. This is executed by the display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
  In the sixth jackpot game, after executing the promotion failure effect described above in the final phase of the promotion effect, the jackpot game is terminated, and in the seventh jackpot game, the promotion success effect described above is executed in the final phase of the promotion effect. After that, the 12th opening of the 5-round grand opening 50 is performed, and the jackpot game is advanced after the 6th round in which the winning ball can be obtained. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion effect is enhanced.
(Game state setting table)
FIG. 11 is a game state setting table for determining the game state after the end of the jackpot game (special game state). As shown in FIG. 11, the type of start opening where the game ball has won, the special symbol stop symbol data, the short-time game state, the short-time game count (J), the stochastic game status, and the high-probability game count (X). Are associated with each other.
  The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, and at the end of the jackpot, based on the type of the start port and the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the short-time game state, the short-time game number (J), the probability game state, and the high The probability game number (X) is determined. Note that when the low probability game state is determined as the probability game state, the high probability game count (X) is not determined.
  As a feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11 in this embodiment, the number of short-time games (J) and the number of high-probability games (X) are shown in the case of special symbols 10 to 13 and special symbols 20 to 22. The point is set not to infinity but to 10,000 times. However, in the high-probability gaming state, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery before 10,000 jackpot lotteries are performed is extremely high, so the short-time gaming state and the high-probability gaming state may continue until the next jackpot lottery is won. I can say that.
(Variation pattern determination table)
12 and 13 are diagrams showing a variation pattern determination table that is referred to when performing variation display of special symbols. FIG. 12 is a variation pattern determination table which is referred to when a special symbol variation display is performed by entering a game ball into the first start opening 45, and FIG. It is a variation pattern determination table referred to when performing variation display of special symbols by entering a ball.
  In the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the winning ball lottery determination result, the special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), and the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 The random number for reach determination acquired at the time, and the first special symbol hold number (U1) that is the current number of first hold or the second special symbol hold number (U2) that is the current second hold number , A special figure variation pattern determination random number acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, a special symbol variation pattern (number), The variation time of the special symbol is associated with the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern (number).
  Therefore, it can be said that the “special symbol variation pattern” can specify at least the jackpot lottery determination result and the special symbol variation time. In addition, when the determination result of the big hit lottery is lost, the reach determination random number is referred to, but in the case of the big win, a reach is generated except in a special case, so the reach determination random number is not referred to. Yes. In addition, the random number range for reach determination and the random number value for special figure variation pattern determination are set to 100 (0 to 99).
  In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, when the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases, the variation pattern 1 (normally so that the average variation time of the special symbol is shortened) Variation pattern 2 (shortening variation: variation time 3 seconds) is more easily determined than variation: variation time 12 seconds. In the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 12, when the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases, the variation pattern 4 (normal variation: variation time 10 seconds) is more than the variation pattern 3 (normal reach: variation time 20 seconds). ) Is easily determined.
  Although the maximum number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) for a special symbol may be “4”, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved balls for the special symbol. Therefore, “4” is not set as the number of reserved balls.
  The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, and determines the jackpot lottery determination result, the special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), the reach determination random number value, and the special symbol hold. Based on the number of spheres (U1 or U2) and the random number for determining the special symbol variation pattern, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation time of the special symbol are determined. Based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  Here, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is “E6H”, a special symbol variation pattern designation command of the first special symbol first display 60 corresponding to the winning of a game ball at the first starting port 45 is shown. When the data is “E7H”, a special symbol variation pattern designation command of the second special symbol first display 61 corresponding to the winning of the game ball at the second start port 47 is indicated.
  In addition, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the effect content related to the change display of the effect symbol 70a is determined based on the change pattern (variation pattern designation command) of the special symbol. In the rightmost column of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the effect content (variation effect pattern) such as the effect symbol 70 a is described as a reference.
  Here, as the production contents, here, “normal fluctuation” and “shortening fluctuation” mean that the plurality of production symbols 70a fluctuate at high speed and stop without reaching, Normal fluctuations and shortening fluctuations are different in that the shortening fluctuations are completed in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuations.
  In addition, “reach” is a variation mode that gives a player a sense of expectation of jackpot, such that a part of the combination of effect symbols 70a that informs the jackpot is temporarily stopped and other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. Means. For example, when a combination of a three-digit effect symbol 70a of “777” is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot (a jackpot result mode), two effect symbols 70a are “ 7 "means that the temporary stop is performed, and the remaining effect symbol 70a is changing in the central region.
  Note that the “temporary stop” means that the effect design 70a is slightly shaken or the effect design 70a is deformed to a small extent, so that it appears to the player as if the effect design 70a is stopped (completely stopped). Not).
  In addition, “normal reach” means a reach with low expectation of jackpot where two effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the left region and right region, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the central region. In the present embodiment, although not big hit by “normal reach”, the big hit may be made by “normal reach”.
  “SP reach” means a super reach with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than a normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect symbol 70a in the central area that is not temporarily stopped changes specially or a special character is displayed.
“SPSP reach” means a special reach that is performed after super reach and has a higher expectation of jackpot than super reach.
In addition, the “full rotation reach” means a mode in which the combination of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is all in a low speed state, and in the present embodiment, only when winning in the jackpot lottery. Means reach to be performed.
  Note that the special symbol variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 are referred to regardless of the gaming state, but a variation pattern determination table having different variation pattern selection modes for each of the plurality of gaming states is provided. You may make it change the variation pattern determination table referred according to the game state at that time.
(Pre-judgment table for jackpot lottery)
FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are diagrams showing a prior determination table for determining in advance the determination result of the special symbol jackpot lottery. FIG. 14 is a pre-judgment table that is referred to when special symbols are changed and displayed by entering a game ball into the first start opening 45. FIG. 15 shows the game ball entering the second start opening 47. It is a prior determination table referred when performing the variable display of a special symbol by a sphere.
  In the pre-judgment tables of FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the winning ball lottery judgment result, the special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), and the game ball has entered the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 The random number value for reach determination acquired at times, the random number value for special pattern variation pattern determination acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, and the planned variation pattern (number) ) Corresponding to the start opening winning designation command.
Here, it is possible to determine in advance whether it is “big hit” or “losing” based on the random number for jackpot determination acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, and for determining the big hit symbol The type of special game and the presence / absence of the transition to the high probability game state can be determined in advance based on the random value.
Furthermore, since the reach contents (presence / absence of reach, type of reach) and the like can be determined in advance by the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random number value, start winning information (DATA for start winning designation command DATA) ) Can determine information on the type of jackpot and the contents of the production (scheduled variation pattern).
  The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-determination tables shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, and based on the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure variation pattern determination random value. "Starting winning information" is determined. Then, based on the determined start winning information, a start winning designation command for determining in advance the result of the jackpot lottery is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  This start winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is “E8H”, a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball is shown at the first start opening 45, and when the MODE data is “E9H”, the second start opening is indicated. 47 shows a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning of a game ball.
  14 and FIG. 15 is similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. However, the prior determination table shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is used when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, whereas the special symbol variation pattern shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is used. The decision table is different in that it is used at the start of special symbol variation. In addition, it is also different whether or not “the number of reserved balls” is referred to.
  For this reason, in the pre-determination tables shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, it is possible to determine the type of jackpot or variation pattern, but the determination result of the jackpot lottery is “losing” and the reach determination random value is “0”. In the case of ˜89 ”, the planned variation pattern is the variation pattern 1 to 4, but it is impossible to determine whether the planned variation pattern is“ normal variation ”,“ shortening variation ”, or“ normal reach ”.
  The special symbol prior determination tables shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 are referred to regardless of the gaming state at that time. However, a preliminary determination table having a different variation pattern selection mode for each of the plurality of gaming states is provided. The prior determination table to be referred to may be changed according to the gaming state at that time.
  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a table relating to the normal symbol and the movable member 48 of the second start port 47. Specifically, FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a normal symbol hit determination table used for the normal symbol hitting lottery, and FIG. 16B is a normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol hitting lottery result. FIG. 16C is a diagram showing a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for determining a regular symbol variation time, and FIG. 16D is a diagram showing a symbol stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the open mode determination table of the 2nd starting port for determining the open mode of the movable member 48 in the winning state (auxiliary game) which generate | occur | produces when winning a winning design lottery.
(Normal hit judgment table for symbols)
As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the hit determination table includes presence / absence of a short-time gaming state, a hit determination random number value acquired when a game ball passes through the general gate 44, and a determination result of the win lottery. It is associated. The main CPU 110a refers to the winning determination table shown in FIG. 16A, and determines whether it is “winning” or “lost” based on the current short-time gaming state and the acquired random number for winning determination.
  For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 16 (a), when it is in the non-short game state, it is determined that one hit determination random number value of “127” is a win, and when it is in the short time game state, “1”. ”To“ 127 ”, 127 hit determination random number values are determined to be hits. Therefore, the probability of being determined to be winning in the non-short game state is 1/128, and the probability of being determined to be winning in the time-saving gaming state is 127/128.
(Normal symbol stop symbol determination table)
In the stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 16 (b), the presence / absence of the short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the random number for winning symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the general gate 44, An ordinary symbol type (ordinary symbol stop symbol data) is associated with an ordinary symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the ordinary symbol type.
The main CPU 110a refers to the stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 16B, and displays the normal symbol first display based on the current short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number for winning symbol. Normal symbol and universal symbol stop symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the device 62 are determined.
Then, at the start of normal symbol variation, based on the determined normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) type, a general symbol designation command as information indicating the normal symbol type is determined and transmitted to the effect control board 130. .
(Normal pattern variation pattern determination table)
In the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16C, the presence / absence of a short-time gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the variation for determining the usual diagram variation pattern acquired when the game ball passes the ordinary diagram gate 44 The numerical value, the normal symbol variation time, and the normal symbol variation pattern designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the regular symbol variation time are associated with each other.
The main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16C, and based on the current short time gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the random variation value for determining the regular variation pattern, the variation time of the normal symbol Will be determined.
Then, at the start of normal symbol variation, based on the determined variation time, a normal symbol variation pattern designation command as information indicating the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined and transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  As a feature of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16 (c), the variation time of the short-time gaming state (3 seconds or 5 seconds) is shorter than the variation time of the non-short-time gaming state (30 seconds or 40 seconds). It is configured.
(Second starting port opening mode determination table)
In the release mode determination table shown in FIG. 16D, the normal symbol (general symbol stop symbol data), the maximum number of opening times (S) of the second start port 47 (movable member 48), and the second start port 47 ( The first opening time and closing time of the movable member 48), the interval time between the first closing time and the second opening time, and the second opening time and closing time are associated with each other.
  The main CPU 110a refers to the release mode determination table shown in FIG. 16 (d), and based on the usual figure stop symbol data, the maximum number of times the second start port 47 (movable member 48) is opened, the first opening time and the closing time. Determine the time, the second opening time and the closing time.
  In the release mode determination table shown in FIG. 16 (d), the release mode based on the usual figure stop symbol data = 02 (ordinary symbol 2) is more game than the release mode based on the usual figure stop symbol data = 01 (normal symbol 1). It is an open mode that is advantageous to the user, and the open mode based on the general map stop symbol data = 03 (ordinary symbol 3) is more open to the player than the open mode based on the general map stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2). This is an advantageous opening mode.
  Note that, as shown in the stop symbol determination table of FIG. 16B, the normal symbol stop symbol data = 3 (ordinary symbol 3) that is most advantageous to the player is determined when winning in the short-time gaming state. . As a result, in the short-time gaming state, the second start port 47 (movable member 48) is operated so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the non-short-time gaming state.
(Various storage areas)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 17A is a diagram showing a special symbol holding storage area in which various types of information are stored when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 and / or the second start opening 47. FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit in the special symbol storage area, and FIG. 17C shows various information stored when the game ball passes through the general gate 44. FIG. 17D is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area.
  As shown in FIG. 17A, the special symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first special symbol reservation storage area, a second special symbol reservation storage area, and a special symbol storage area, and the first special symbol reservation storage area. The storage unit and the second special symbol holding storage area are divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the special symbol related storage area is configured by the 0th storage unit.
  As shown in FIG. 17B, each storage unit has a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value, and a jackpot symbol determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot symbol determination random value. And a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage region for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random value.
  Then, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45, the special symbol determination information (big hit) is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number among the storage units in which no random number is stored in the first special symbol storage area. A random number for determination, a random number for jackpot symbol determination, a random number for reach determination, and a random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination) are stored. In addition, when a game ball enters the second start port 47, the special figure determination information (in the second special symbol holding storage area, the storage unit with the smallest number among the storage units in which no random number is stored) A jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol determination random number, a reach determination random number, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number) are stored.
  The 0th storage part of the special symbol storage area is stored in the first storage part of the storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area that satisfies the start condition of the variable symbol display. As the stored special figure determination information is shifted, the special figure determination information related to the current special symbol variation display is stored.
  As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the normal symbol holding storage area is divided from the 0th storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and as shown in FIG. A random number storage area for hit determination for storing numerical values, a random number storage area for determination of hit symbols for storing random numbers for determination of hit patterns, and a normal pattern change for storing random numbers for determining normal pattern variation patterns It is divided into a random number storage area for pattern determination.
  Then, when a game ball passes through the general gate 44, the storage unit with the smallest number among the storage units in which the random numbers are not stored among the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area. Common figure determination information (random number for winning determination, random number for determining winning pattern, random number for determining normal pattern variation pattern) is stored. The 0th storage unit shifts the common symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit when the start condition of the normal symbol variation display is satisfied, so that the normal symbol determination related to the current normal symbol variation display is performed. Information will be stored.
  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.
(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 110.
  When a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 180, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.
  First, in step S1, the main CPU 110a sets permission to access the main RAM 110c.
  In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is ON (whether the RAM clear switch is pressed). If the RAM clear switch is ON (S2: Yes). Shifts to step S8, and when the RAM clear switch is not ON (S2: No), shifts to step S3.
  In step S3, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is turned on.
  In step S4, the main CPU 110a compares the created checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is turned on with the checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is cut off. Here, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S5 when the compared checksums match (S4: Yes), and proceeds to step S5 when the compared checksums do not match (S4: No). The process proceeds to S8.
  In step S5, the main CPU 110a loads the backup data stored in the backed up main RAM 110c, and performs a setting process for the main RAM 110c for setting the backup data in the work area of the main RAM 110c.
  In step S6, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting of devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 130, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.
  In step S <b> 7, the main CPU 110 a sets a power restoration designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and transmits it to the effect control board 130.
  In step S8, the main CPU 110a sets a RAM clear designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and transmits it to the effect control board 130.
  In step S9, the main CPU 110a waits until the RAM clear switch is turned ON again (pressing operation). When the RAM clear switch is turned ON again (pressing operation), the process proceeds to step S10.
  In step S10, the main CPU 110a clears the use area of the main RAM 110c, and performs a setting process for the main RAM 110c that sets an initial value in a work area of the main RAM 110c that requires an initial value at the time of initialization.
  In step S11, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting of devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 130, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, etc. are set.
  In step S12, the main CPU 110a sets a power-on designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and transmits it to the effect control board 130.
  In step S <b> 13, the main CPU 110 a sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of special symbol reservations in the effect transmission data storage area, and transmits it to the effect control board 130.
  In step S <b> 14, the main CPU 110 a sets a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of normal symbols held in the effect transmission data storage area, and transmits it to the effect control board 130.
  In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value and the jackpot symbol determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol.
  In step S30, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot determining initial value random number, the jackpot symbol determining initial value random number, the hit determining initial value random number, and the winning symbol determining initial value random number.
  In step S40, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power interruption has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal is input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply substrate 180. If the power failure detection signal is not input (S40: No), the process proceeds to step S20. When the power interruption detection signal is input (S40: Yes), the process proceeds to step S41.
  In step S41, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting the timer interrupt, performs a process of clearing the output port in step S42, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S43, and stores it in a predetermined storage area. In step S44, a process for turning on the backup flag to be referred to upon recovery from the power interruption is performed. In step S45, a process for prohibiting the RAM access is performed, and the process waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off. .
(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110. A clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110, thereby executing a timer interrupt process described below.
  First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 110a to the stack area.
  In step S110, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, updates the normal symbol time counter, and updates the opening / closing time of the movable member 48. Time control processing for updating various timer counters such as processing is performed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, the start / open timer counter, and the start / close timer counter is performed.
  In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random number value, the special figure variation pattern determination random value, the hit determination random number value, the hit symbol random number value, the common symbol variation pattern determination random number value. A specific random number update process such as is performed.
  Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter has made one round), the random number counter is returned to 0 and the corresponding initial value random number value is set as a new cyclic initial value. To update the random number.
  In step S130, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot determination initial value random number value, the jackpot symbol determination initial value random value, the hit symbol determination initial value random value, and the hit symbol determination initial value random number value in the same manner as in step S30. Perform initial random number update processing.
  In step S200, the main CPU 110a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 110a performs a variety of general winning opening detection switch 43a, large winning opening detection switch 50a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, gate detection switch 44a, and winning confirmation detection switch 52a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch. If there is an input, an input control process for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process for performing a jackpot lottery, a special symbol display control, an opening / closing control of the special winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), a game state control, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S <b> 400, the main CPU 110 a performs a general power control process for performing winning lottery, normal symbol display control, opening / closing control of the second start port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process. In this payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to each prize ball counter, generates payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports, and transmits the generated payout number designation commands to the payout control board 120.
  In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs a magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process. In this magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process, the main CPU 110a detects the occurrence of a magnetic error or radio wave error based on the input signals from the magnetic detection switch 53a and the radio wave detection switch 54a. A designation command and a radio wave abnormality error designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 130. When the production control board 130 receives a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation command, it performs a radio wave error notification or a magnetic error notification to notify that an abnormality has occurred.
  In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs the external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, the drive control data output to the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b, the special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b, and the first special symbol. 1st indicator 60, 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61, normal symbol 1st indicator 62, 1st special symbol hold 1st indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold 1st indicator 64, normal symbol hold 1st Data creation processing such as various display control data to be output to the 1-display 65, the round-number display 66, the right-handed first display 67, the high-probability gaming state display 68, and the short-time gaming state display 69 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing. In this processing, port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data and drive control data created in S700 is performed. Further, display output processing for outputting a signal such as display control data created in S700 is performed. Further, command output processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board is also performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
Note that the types of commands transmitted to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS.
  In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.
(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described using FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.
  In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a. If there is no input of a detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.
  When a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, a predetermined data is added to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening and updated, and a winning counter indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening. After updating by adding “1” to (D) (D ← D + 1), the process proceeds to the next step.
  In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. In this special winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a. If no detection signal is input from the big prize opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to the next step.
  When a detection signal from the big prize opening detection switch 50a is inputted, a predetermined data is added to the prize ball counter for the big prize opening and updated, and the number of game balls entered into the prize opening is indicated. The counter (D) is updated by adding “1” (D ← D + 1), and 1 is added to the number of entries in the big winning opening (C) for counting the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 50 After updating (C ← C + 1), the process proceeds to the next step.
  In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first start port detection switch input process. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45, and a predetermined value is determined. Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port detection switch input process. In this second start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 47, Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the normal gate 44, and predetermined data is set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process. In this winning confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a is input, and 1 is subtracted from the winning counter (D) and updated (D ← D-1). It is determined whether or not the value of the pitch counter (D) is within a predetermined determination value range (lower limit value <D <upper limit value), and if it is out of the determination value range, an abnormal winning occurs. As a result, an abnormal winning error designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. If it is within the determination value range, the winning confirmation detection switch input process is terminated.
  As a result, an abnormal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the abnormal winning error designation command performs an abnormal winning error notification to indicate that an abnormal winning error has occurred. Inform.
(Input processing for the first start port detection switch on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input (S230-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S230-2, and the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input. In the case (S230-1: No), the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding predetermined data to the start opening prize ball counter used for the prize ball and updating it.
  In step S230-3, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the pitch counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening and updates (D ← D + 1).
  In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area is less than 4. If the data set in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and is set in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area. If the data is not less than 4, the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding “1” to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1).
  In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a obtains a jackpot determination random number value, searches for a free storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and stores the free storage. The random number for jackpot determination acquired in the section is stored.
  In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires a jackpot symbol determination random number value, searches for an empty storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol hold storage area, and is free. The acquired jackpot symbol determination random value is stored in the storage unit.
  In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for reach determination and a random number value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination, and stores storage units that are vacant in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area. The search is performed, and the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value are stored in an empty storage unit.
  Thus, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random number value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area. It becomes.
  In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process. In the first pre-determination process, the jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in FIG. 14 is referred to, and the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure variation pattern determination acquired this time Based on the random number value, first start winning information for indicating the determination information of the first start port in advance is determined.
  In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets a first start opening prize designation command based on the first start prize information determined in the first preliminary determination process in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area. .
  As a result, the first start prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start prize designation command receives the first start prize designation command. Continuous analysis of a command and a predetermined notice effect over one or more variable displays executed before the start of variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start winning designation command It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect such as a notice of change on hold and a notice of change on hold that changes the display mode of the icon (hold icon, the change icon).
  In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the first special symbol hold count (U1) and corresponds to the first special symbol hold count (U1) updated in step S230-4. A first special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.
  In step S230-12, the main CPU 110a displays first special symbol hold display data for displaying the first hold number on the first special symbol hold first display 63 (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area. The first start port detection switch input process is completed. Thus, when the first special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The first hold number is displayed on the symbol hold first display 63.
(Second control port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The second start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the second start port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input. When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is input (S240-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-2, and the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is not input. In the case (S240-1: No), the current second start port detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding predetermined data to the starting opening prize ball counter used for a prize ball and updating it.
  In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the pitch counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening and updates (D ← D + 1).
  In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an auxiliary game (winning state) is in progress. If the auxiliary game (winning state) is in progress (S240-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-9. If the auxiliary game (winning state) is not in progress (S240-5: No), step S240- The processing is moved to 5.
  In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the unauthorized entry counter (E) for monitoring unauthorized entry to the second start port 47 and updates (E ← E + 1).
  In step S240-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the illegal entry counter is greater than the specified number (10). If it is larger than the specified number (S240-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-7, and if it is smaller than the specified number (S240-6: No), the process proceeds to step S240-10.
  In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a sets an illegal entry error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, assuming that an illegal entry has occurred.
  As a result, an illegal entry error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the production control board 130 that has received the unauthorized entry error designation command performs an illegal entry error notification and performs an illegal entry error. Informs that this has occurred.
  In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the illegal pitching counter (E) to zero.
  In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the second start-port entrance counter (L) to update (L ← L + 1).
  In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is less than four. If the data set in the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area is less than 4 (S240-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S240-11, and the second special symbol hold count ( U2) If the data set in the storage area is not less than 4 (S240-10: No), the current second start port detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding “1” to the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area and updating (U2 ← U2 + 1).
  In step S240-12, the main CPU 110a acquires a jackpot determination random number value, searches for an empty storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol holding storage area, and stores an empty storage. The random number for jackpot determination acquired in the section is stored.
  In step S240-13, the main CPU 110a acquires a jackpot symbol determination random number value, searches for an empty storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol hold storage area, and is free. The acquired jackpot symbol determination random value is stored in the storage unit.
  In step S240-14, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for reach determination and a random number value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination, and stores storage units that are vacant in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area. The search is performed, and the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value are stored in an empty storage unit.
  Thus, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random number value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area. It becomes.
  In step S240-15, the main CPU 110a performs a second preliminary determination process. In this second pre-determination process, with reference to the jackpot lottery pre-determination table shown in FIG. 15, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure variation pattern determination acquired this time Based on the random number value, second start winning information for indicating in advance the determination information of the second start port is determined.
  In step S240-16, the main CPU 110a sets a second start winning designation command based on the second start winning information determined in the second pre-determination process in step S240-14 in the effect transmission data storage area.
  As a result, the second start prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the second start prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the second start prize designation command receives the second start prize designation command. Continuous notice or icon for analyzing a command and executing a predetermined notice effect over one or more change displays before the start of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the second start winning designation command A pre-reading effect such as a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon can be executed.
  In step S240-17, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the second special symbol hold count (U2), and corresponds to the second special symbol hold count (U2) updated in step S240-9. A second special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.
  In step S240-18, the main CPU 110a displays second special symbol hold display data for displaying the second hold number on the second special symbol hold first display 64 (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area. After setting, the second start port detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, when the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The second hold number is displayed on the symbol hold first display 64.
(Gate detection switch input processing on the main control board)
The gate detection switch input of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a gate detection switch input process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S250-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input. When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input (S250-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-2, and when the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is not input (S250-1: No) terminates the current gate detection switch input process.
  In step S250-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area is less than four. When the data set in the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area is less than 4 (S250-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S250-3, and the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area If the data set in is not less than 4 (S250-2: No), the current gate detection switch input process is terminated.
  In step S250-3, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating by adding “1” to the normal symbol holding number (G) (G ← G + 1).
  In step S250-4, the main CPU 110a obtains a random number for winning determination, searches for a free storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area, and stores it in the free storage unit. The acquired random number for hit determination is stored.
  In step S250-5, the main CPU 110a acquires a random symbol value for winning symbol determination, and searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol hold storage area. The random number value for determining the winning symbol is stored.
  In step S250-6, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for determining a normal pattern variation pattern, searches for a free storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area, and is free. The random number value for determining the normal variation pattern obtained is stored in the storage unit.
  As described above, the random number value for winning determination, the random number value for winning symbol, and the random number value for determining normal pattern variation pattern are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the normal symbol storage area.
  In step S250-7, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area, and designates the normal symbol storage designation corresponding to the normal symbol hold count (G) updated in step S250-3. Set the command in the transmission data storage area for presentation.
  In step S250-8, the main CPU 110a sets normal symbol hold display data for displaying the number of normal symbols on hold (the LED is turned on or blinking) on the normal symbol hold first display 65 in a predetermined processing area. The current gate detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The number of pending drawings is displayed on the display 65.
(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
With reference to FIG. 24, the special figure special power control process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S301, the CPU 110a loads the special figure special electricity processing data value, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special electric treatment data = 0, the special symbol. The process moves to the memory determination process (step S310). If the special symbol special power process data = 1, the process moves to the special symbol variation process (step S320). The process moves to step S330), and if special figure special power processing data = 3, the process moves to jackpot game processing (step S340), and if special figure special power processing data = 4, the big bonus game end process (step S350) is processed. Move.
  This “special drawing special electricity processing data” is set as needed in each subroutine of the special figure special electricity control processing as will be described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. .
  In the special symbol memory determination process in step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process, a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol to be stopped, a special symbol variation pattern determination process for determining a variation time of the special symbol, and the like. . This special symbol memory determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
  In the special symbol variation process of step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. When the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the special symbol stop of step S330. Process to be transferred to the process. This special symbol variation process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
  In the special symbol stop process in step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a process corresponding to the special symbol (hit symbol, lost game) that is stopped and displayed, and the number of time-short games (J), the time-short game flag, and the number of high-probability games. (X) A high probability game flag setting process is performed. This special symbol stop process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
  In the jackpot game process of step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the jackpot game. The jackpot game process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
  In the jackpot game ending process in step S350, the main CPU 110a determines the probability game state of either the high probability game state or the low probability game state, and changes the game state of either the short-time game state or the non-time-short game state. Perform the decision process. The jackpot game end process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing special symbol memory determination processing in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being variably displayed. If the special symbol variation display is in progress (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and the special symbol variation display is not in progress (special symbol time counter = 0). In (S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2.
  In step S310-2, if the special symbol is not changing (S310-1: No), the main CPU 110a stores the value of the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area storing the second hold number. Is determined to be 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area is 1 or more (S310-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-3, and the second special symbol hold count (U2) If the value of the storage area is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the process proceeds to step S310-4.
  In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts “1” from the value stored in the second special symbol hold count (U2) storage area and updates (U2 ← U2-1).
  In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area storing the first hold number is 1 or more. When it is determined that the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area is 1 or more (S310-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S310-5, and the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area If the value is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the process proceeds to step S319-1.
  In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a updates (U1 ← U1-1) by subtracting “1” from the value stored in the first special symbol hold count (U1) storage area.
  In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the special symbol reservation number (U) storage area subtracted in steps S310-2 to S310-5. . Specifically, each data stored in the fourth storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special symbol random number storage area or the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is stored in the special symbol hold storage. It will be erased from the area. As a result, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted.
  In this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-6, the second special symbol reserved storage area is shifted (digested) with priority over the first special symbol reserved storage area. In this order, the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted, or the first special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted with priority over the second special symbol reserved storage area. May be.
  In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a, based on the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area or the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area subtracted in step S310-2 or step S310-4. Then, the special symbol memory designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.
  In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a, based on the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area or the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area subtracted in step S310-2 or step S310-4. The special symbol hold display data is set in a predetermined processing area. Thus, when the first special symbol hold display data or the first special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. By doing so, the number of reservations (first reservation number, second reservation number) is displayed on the first special symbol hold first display 63 or the second special symbol hold first display 64.
  In step S311, the main CPU 110a is based on the data (the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot symbol determination random value) written in the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit) of the special symbol holding storage area in step S310-6. The jackpot determination process is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S312, the main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing. The variation pattern determination process refers to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13 and results of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol type, the number of special symbol reservations (U), the acquired reach determination random number value and the special diagram A special figure variation pattern is determined based on the random number value for variation pattern determination.
  In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area.
  In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the gaming state at the start of variation, and sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area.
  In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol variation time (counter value) based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in S110.
  In step S316, the main CPU 110a provides special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol first indicator 60 or the second special symbol first indicator 61 to perform special symbol variation display (LED blinking). Set to the processing area. As a result, when special symbol variation display data is set in a predetermined processing area, LED lighting / extinguishing data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. Variation display of the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 is started.
  In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets “00H” in the customer waiting state determination flag, sets “1” in the special figure special electric processing data in step S318, and prepares for shifting to the special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. Then, the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated.
  In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag is “01H”. When the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is not set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area (S319-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S319-2 to wait for the customer waiting state determination flag. When the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the storage area (S319-1: No), the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets “00H” to the customer waiting state determination flag, sets a customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol memory determination process of this time. To do.
(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process for the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process in the main control board 110.
  In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot determination process is performed based on the game ball entering the first start port 45. When it is determined that the main CPU 110a is the first start port (S311-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S311-2, and when the main CPU 110a determines that it is not the first start port (is the second start port). In (S311-1: No), the processing is moved to step S311-3.
  In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a selects a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S311-3, the main CPU 110a selects a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.
  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 110a collates the jackpot determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the current probability gaming state and special symbol in the storage area with the selected jackpot determination table. Then, it is determined whether it is “big hit” or “losing”.
  In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot is won. When the main CPU 110a determines that the jackpot is won (S311-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S311-6, and when the main CPU 110a determines that the jackpot is not won (S311-5: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S311-7.
  In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a jackpot. On the other hand, in step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for loss.
  In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a determines the type of the start port for which the jackpot lottery (determination) has been performed, the jackpot symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area, A special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data) is determined by collating with the selected table.
  As will be described later, the determined special symbol is used to determine whether or not it is a big win in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 29, and determines the operation mode of the big prize opening in the big hit game process of FIG. It is also used to determine the gaming state after the jackpot end in the jackpot game end process of FIG.
  In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure stop symbol data determined in step S311-8 in the special figure stop symbol data storage area.
  In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a identifies an effect symbol designating command based on the special bonus stop symbol data determined in step S311-8, and transmits the identified effect symbol designating command to the effect transmission data storage area. Set to. As a result, the effect designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
(Special map variation pattern determination process for the main control board)
With reference to FIG. 27, the special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.
  In step S312-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special figure variation pattern determination process is performed based on a game ball entering the first start port 45. When it is determined that the main CPU 110a is the first starting port (S312-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S312-2, and when it is determined that the main CPU 110a is not the first starting port (is the second starting port). In (S312-1: No), the processing is moved to step S312-3.
  In step S312-2, the main CPU 110a selects a variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S312-3, the main CPU 110a selects a variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol.
  Next, in step S312-4, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot lottery determination result, the special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), and the reach determination stored in the 0th storage unit in the special symbol storage area. The special pattern variation pattern is determined by comparing the random number value for use and the random number value for special pattern variation pattern determination, the current number of reserved balls, and the selected variation pattern determination table.
  In step S312-5, the main CPU 110a sets a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312-4 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in S110.
  In step S312-6, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312-4 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
(Special design variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.
  In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in step S312-5 has passed (special symbol time counter = 0). As a result, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation process is terminated.
  If the main CPU 110a determines in step S320-2 that the set time has elapsed, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) determined in step S311-8 is used as the first special symbol. Special symbol stop display data for stopping display on the symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 is set in a predetermined processing area. Thereby, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first indicator 61, and the determination result of the big hit lottery is given to the player. It will be notified.
  In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol confirmation command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S320-4, when the main CPU 110a starts the special symbol stop display as described above, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125 counter) in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in S110.
  In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets “2” in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares for shifting to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 29, and ends the special symbol variation processing of this time.
(Special design stop processing for main control board)
The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.
  In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). As a result, if it is determined that the symbol stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S330-2. If it is determined that the symbol stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process is terminated. To do.
  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is set (ON) in the time saving game flag storage area. When the short-time game flag is set (S330-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-3, and when the short-time game flag is not set (S330-2: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S330-8.
  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts and updates (J ← J-1) by subtracting "1" from the time-saving game count (J) stored in the time-saving game count (J) storage area, and step S330- 4, it is determined whether the new number of short-time games (J) is “0”. If the main CPU 110a determines that the number of short-time games (J) is “0” (S330-4: Yes), the process moves to step S330-5, and the number of short-time games (J) is not “0”. Is determined (S330-4: No), the process proceeds to step S330-8.
  In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a clears (turns off) the time-short game flag set in the time-short game flag storage area. As a result, the short-time gaming state ends and the non-short-time gaming state shifts.
  In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets time-short game state erasure data for erasing (LED off) the display of the time-short game state indicator 69 (LED lighting) in a predetermined processing area. Thereby, when the short-time gaming state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the short-time gaming state indicator is displayed. The display of 69 is erased.
  In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets right-handed erasure data for erasing the display (LED lighting) on the right-handed first display 67 (LED turning off) in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when right-handed erasure data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The display of 67 is deleted.
  In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area. When the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area (S330-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-9, and stores the high probability game in the high probability game flag storage area. If the flag is not set (S330-8: No), the process proceeds to step S330-13.
  In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a subtracts and updates (X ← X-1) by subtracting “1” from the high probability game count (X) stored in the high probability game count (X) storage area. In S330-10, it is determined whether or not the new high probability game count (X) is “0”. When the main CPU 110a determines that the high probability game count (X) is “0” (S330-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-11, and the high probability game count (X) is “0”. If not (S330-10: No), the process proceeds to step S330-13.
  In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a clears (OFF) the high probability game flag set in the high probability game flag storage area. As a result, the high-probability gaming state ends, and a transition is made to the low-probability gaming state.
  In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a sets high-probability gaming state erasure data for erasing (LED off) the display (LED lighting) on the high-probability gaming state indicator 68 in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when high probability gaming state erasure data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The display on the display 68 is erased.
In step S330-13, the main CPU 110a confirms the current gaming state and sets a gaming state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol that has been stopped is a special bonus symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop symbol data stored in the special figure stop symbol data storage area is a jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 16, 20 to 23). . If the main CPU 110a determines that it is a special jackpot symbol (S330-14: Yes), it moves the process to step S330-15, and if it is determined that it is not a special jackpot symbol (S330-14: No). Moves the process to step S330-26.
  In step S330-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is set (ON) in the time-saving game flag storage area. When the short-time game flag is set (S330-15: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S330-16, and when the short-time game flag is not set (S330-15: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S330-17.
  In step S330-16, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving gaming state erasure data in a predetermined processing area.
  In step S330-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area. When the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area (S330-17: Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S330-18, and stores the high probability game in the high probability game flag storage area. If the flag is not set (S330-17: No), the process proceeds to step S330-19.
  In step S330-18, the main CPU 110a sets high-probability gaming state erasure data in a predetermined processing area.
  In step S330-19, the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and prepares for shifting to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG.
  In step S330-20, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state and the number of time reductions. Specifically, the data stored in the high probability game flag storage area, the high probability game count (X) storage area, the time-short game flag storage area, and the time-short game count (J) storage area is cleared.
  In step S330-21, the main CPU 110a sets a special prize opening / closing control table. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8, the big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No) corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data is set (set).
  In step S330-22, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time in the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special symbol stop symbol data. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.
  In step S330-23, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special game (the first jackpot game to the tenth jackpot game) based on the jackpot opening / closing control table set in step S330-17, and the jackpot game An opening designation command corresponding to the type of (special game state) is set in the transmission data storage area for effects. Thereby, the opening designation command for the special game is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S330-24, the main CPU 110a sets round number display data for displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game on the round number display 66 (LED lighting) in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the round number display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is generated in step S700, and the generated data is output in step S800, whereby the round number display 66 is displayed. The number of rounds is displayed.
  In step S330-25, the main CPU 110a sets right-handed display data for right-handed display (LED lighting) on the right-handed first display 67 in a predetermined processing area, and performs the special symbol stop processing this time. finish. Thus, when right-handed display data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, whereby the right-handed first display device is displayed. A right-handed display is performed at 67.
  On the other hand, in step S330-26, the main CPU 110a sets “0” in the special symbol special processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 25, and ends the special symbol stop processing this time. To do.
(Big hit game processing of main control board)
The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the round game number (R) storage area. If it is determined that it is currently opening (S340-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening (S340-1: No), step S340-6 is performed. Move processing to.
  In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S330-14 has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-3, and if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated. .
  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, “1” is added to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area to update (R ← R + 1). Here, since no round game has been performed yet, “1” is stored in the round game count (R) storage area.
  In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a special prize opening process. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the special winning opening 50 has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the number-of-openings (K) storage area. Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50, the big winning opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set to the game timer counter.
  In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Accordingly, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Here, since it is the first round of the jackpot game, the opening first round designation command is set. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.
  In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening 50 is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. If it is determined that the special winning opening 50 is open (S340-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-7, and if it is determined that the special winning opening 50 is not open (S340-6: No). ) Moves the process to step S340-9.
  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for ending the opening of the special winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the winning prize entrance pitch counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or the opening time has elapsed in the current number of opening (K) (special game timer counter = 0) Is applicable. When it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied (S340-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-8, and when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S340-7: No). This jackpot game processing is terminated.
  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a performs an interval (big prize closing closing) process. Specifically, the special winning opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the open / close member 51 of the special winning opening 50 into the closed state is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the special winning opening 50 is closed. Also, referring to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-21, the closing time of the big winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of open times (K). Set to the game timer counter. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.
  In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently in the interval (large winning opening closed). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the special prize opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. When it is determined that it is during the interval (closed to the big prize opening) (S340-9: Yes), the process is moved to step S340-10, and when it is determined that the interval is not being closed (closed to the big prize opening) (S340-9). : No), the process proceeds to step S340-19.
  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening 50 has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter is not “0”. If it is determined that the closing time has ended (S340-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-11. If it is determined that the closing time has not ended (S340-10: No), this time The jackpot game process is terminated.
  In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning prize entry counter (C) has reached a specified number (9) or the number of times of opening (K) has reached the maximum number of times of opening. If it is determined that the current round has ended (S340-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-13, and if it is determined that the current round has not ended (S340-12: No), Then, the process proceeds to step S340-12.
  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50, the big winning opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set to the game timer counter. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.
  In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area has reached the maximum round game number of the current jackpot game. If it is determined that the final round is completed (S340-13: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-17. If it is determined that the final round is not completed (S340-13: No), step S340 is performed. The process is moved to -14.
  In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a performs a round data setting process. Specifically, “0” is set in the number-of-releases (K) storage area and the number of balls received in the big prize opening (C) storage area, and the number of round games (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area. Is updated by adding “1” (R ← R + 1).
  In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a performs a big prize opening process. Specifically, first, “1” is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50, the big winning opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. Thereby, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the special winning opening 50 is opened. In addition, with reference to the big winning opening opening determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is specially determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K). Set to the game timer counter.
  In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the round game number (R) stored in the round game number (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Accordingly, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.
  In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a performs an ending transition process. Specifically, “0” is set in the number of times released (K) storage area, the number of balls received in the big prize opening (C) and the number of round games (R), and the values in the respective storage areas are cleared. Also, based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop symbol data, the ending time is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.
  In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Accordingly, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.
In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently ending. If it is ending (S340-19: Yes), step S
When the process proceeds to 340-20 and the ending is not in progress (S340-19: No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.
  In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S340-20: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-21. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S340-20: No), this time The jackpot game process is terminated.
  In step S340-21, the main CPU 110a sets 4 in the special figure special electricity processing data, prepares to move to the big hit game end process shown in FIG. 31, and ends the current big hit game process.
(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game end process in the main control board 110.
  In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the special figure stop symbol data and the gaming state setting table set in the special figure stop symbol data storage area.
  In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs a high probability game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 11, if the special figure stop symbol data is to set a high probability game flag, set the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area, When the special figure stop symbol data does not set the high probability game flag, the high probability game flag is not set in the high probability flag storage area or the high probability game flag storage area is cleared. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is “10”, the high probability flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, and if the special figure stop symbol data is “14”, the high probability game flag is not set.
  In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing. Specifically, with reference to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 11, when the special figure stop symbol data sets the high probability gaming number, the remaining variation number (X) storage area of the high probability gaming state A predetermined number of times is set in. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is “10”, 10000 is set in the remaining fluctuation count (X) storage area of the high probability game state, and if the special figure stop symbol data is “14”, the high probability game Nothing is set or 0 is set in the remaining change count (X) state storage area.
  In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 11, if the special figure stop symbol data sets the short time game flag, the short time game flag is set in the short time game flag storage area, and the special time stop flag data is set. When the figure stop symbol data does not set the short time game flag, the short time game flag is not set in the short time game flag storage area or the short time game flag storage area is cleared. In the embodiment of the present invention, the short-time game flag is set for any special figure stop symbol data.
  In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a performs time-saving game number setting processing. Specifically, referring to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 11, when the special figure stop symbol data sets the number of short-time games, a predetermined number of times are stored in the remaining variation number (J) storage area of the short-time gaming state. Set the number of times. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is “10”, 10000 is set in the remaining change count (J) storage area of the short-time gaming state, and if the special figure stop symbol data is “14”, the short-time gaming state 100 is set in the remaining fluctuation count (J) storage area.
  In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a confirms the gaming state with reference to the high probability gaming flag storage area and the short-time gaming flag storage area, and sends a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state to the effect transmission data storage area. Set to. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets round number erasure data for erasing (LED off) on the round number display 66 (LED on) in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when round number deletion data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. The display is cleared.
  In step S350-8, the main CPU 110a sets “0” in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG. 25, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.
(Main figure normal power control processing of main control board)
The ordinary power transmission control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a general power control process in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S401, the CPU 110a loads general-purpose normal power processing data, refers to the branch address from the general-purpose normal power processing data loaded in step S402, and is normal if the general-purpose normal power processing data = 0. The process moves to the symbol variation process (step S410), and if the ordinary figure normal power process data = 1, the process moves to the auxiliary game process (step S420).
  This “Putsu-Fuji Electric Power Processing Data” will be set as necessary in each sub-routine control processing subroutine as will be described later, so that the sub-routines necessary for the game will be processed appropriately. It becomes.
  In the normal symbol variation process of step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process, a normal symbol determination process for determining a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, a normal symbol variation pattern determination process for determining a variation time of the normal symbol, and the like. This normal symbol variation process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
  In the auxiliary game process of step S420, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the auxiliary game (winning game). This auxiliary game process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
(Normal design variation processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.
  First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation display is in progress. When the normal symbol variation display is in progress (normal symbol time counter ≠ 0) (step S410-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-12, and when the normal symbol variation display is not in progress (step S410-1). : No), the process proceeds to step S410-2.
  In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area storing the general symbol hold count is 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area is 1 or more (S410-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-3, and the value of the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area Is determined to be not 1 or more (S410-2: No), the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.
  In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates (G ← G + 1) by subtracting “1” from the value stored in the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area.
  In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a performs a shift process on the data stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area subtracted in step S410-2. Specifically, each data stored in the fourth storage unit from the first storage unit in the normal symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (the 0th storage unit) is normally stored in the symbol storage. It will be erased from the area. Thereby, the random number value for hit determination, the random number value for hit symbol determination, and the random number value for normal pattern variation pattern determination used in the previous game are deleted.
  In step S410-5, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol memory designation command in the effect transmission data storage area and transmits it to the effect control board 130.
  In step S410-6, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol hold display data in a predetermined processing area.
  In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process. Specifically, the current short-time gaming state and the random number for winning determination stored in the 0th storage part of the normal symbol holding storage area are collated with the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Judgment whether or not to win (normal symbol winning lottery).
  In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process. Specifically, the current short-time gaming state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-7, and the random number value for stopping the normal illustration stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area are shown in FIG. The normal symbol type (normal symbol stop symbol data) is determined by collating with the normal symbol stop symbol determination table shown in b), and is set in the normal symbol stop symbol storage area.
  In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a identifies a common figure designation command based on the common figure stop symbol data determined in step S410-8, and sets the identified common figure designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. To do. As a result, the common map designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a performs a general variation pattern determination process. Specifically, the current short time gaming state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-7, and the common figure variation pattern random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area are shown in FIG. The normal symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined by comparing with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in c).
  In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a specifies a common figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the normal symbol determined in step S410-10, and executes the identified common figure fluctuation pattern designation command. Set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the common map variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time of the normal symbol determined in step S410-10 in the normal symbol time counter. The normal symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.
  In step S410-13, the main CPU 110a sets normal symbol fluctuation display data for causing the normal symbol first display 62 to perform normal symbol fluctuation display (LED blinking). Thus, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is generated in step S700, and the generated data is output in step S800, whereby the normal symbol first display is performed. The change display of the device 62 is started.
  In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol time counter set in step S410-11 is "0". If it is determined that the normal symbol variation time has ended (S410-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-15, and if it is determined that the normal symbol variation time has not ended (S410-14: In No), the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.
  In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a sets normal symbol stop display data for stopping the normal symbol determined in step S410-8 on the normal symbol first display 62 in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is generated in step S700, and the generated data is output in step S800, whereby the normal symbol first display is performed. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the device 62, and the determination result of the lottery is notified to the player.
  In step S410-16, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thus, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit stop symbol. If it is a winning stop symbol (S410-17: Yes), the process proceeds to step S410-18, and if it is not a winning stop symbol (S410-17: No), the current normal symbol variation process is terminated.
  In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets “1” in the ordinary power transmission processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG.
  In step S410-19, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, first, the main CPU 110a sets an opening mode determination table for the second start port of the main RAM 110c, and sets “1” to the number of times of opening (S) stored in the number of times of opening (S) storage area. Add and update (S ← S + 1). Here, since the second start port 47 has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the open count (S) storage area. Then, in order to open the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47, energization data for energizing the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b is set. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second start port 47 is opened. Further, referring to the opening mode determination table for the second starting port, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S). When this process ends, the current normal symbol variation process ends. The auxiliary game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.
(Auxiliary game processing of main control board)
The auxiliary game process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110.
  In step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second start port is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second start opening / closing solenoid 48b is set. When it is determined that the second start port 47 is open (S420-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-2, and when it is determined that the second start port 47 is not open (S420-1). : No), the process proceeds to step S420-7.
  In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an opening end condition for the second start port is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the second start entrance ball counter (L) has reached the specified number (10) or the opening time at the current opening number (S) has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter = 0) ) Is applicable. When it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied (S420-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-3, and when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S420-2: No). Then, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.
  In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port closing process. Specifically, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 to the closed state is set. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the second start port 47 is closed. In addition, referring to the second starting port opening mode determination table set in step S410-19, the closing time of the second starting port 47 is set to the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S). set. When this process ends, the current auxiliary game process ends.
  In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an auxiliary game end condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the number of times the second start port 7 is opened with a preset number of power transmission operation numbers (D), or the value of the second start port entrance counter (L) is a specified number (10 ). When the main CPU 110a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied (S420-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-5, and when the main CPU 110a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied (S420). -4: No) ends the auxiliary game process.
  In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game end processing. Specifically, “0” is set in the number of times of opening the second start opening (S) storage area and the second start opening ball counter (L) storage area, and the values in the respective storage areas are cleared.
  In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the normal-use normal power processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. When this process ends, the current auxiliary game process ends.
  In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second start port has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter is not “0”. If it is determined that the closing time of the second start port has ended (S420-7: Yes), the process proceeds to step S420-8, and it is determined that the closing time of the second start port has not ended ( In S420-7: No), the current auxiliary game process is terminated.
  In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port opening process. Specifically, second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b to set the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 is set. Thereby, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second start port 47 is opened. Also, with reference to the second starting port opening mode determination table set in step S410-17, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of opening times (S). To do.
(Main control board data creation process)
The data creation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing data creation processing in the main control board 110.
  In step S700-1, the main CPU 110a opens or closes the big prize opening / closing solenoid 51b based on the big prize opening / closing solenoid energization start data or the big prize opening / closing solenoid energization stop data set in the big hit game process. Drive control data corresponding to the drive signal for driving is created.
  In step S700-2, the main CPU 110a opens the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b based on the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data or the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization stop data set in the auxiliary game process. Drive control data corresponding to the drive signal for driving in the closed state is created.
  In step S700-3, the main CPU 110a executes the first special symbol first display 60 or the first symbol based on the special symbol variation display data or the special symbol stop display data set in the special symbol memory determination process or the special symbol variation process. (2) Special symbol first display display control data corresponding to a special symbol display signal for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing the LED of the special symbol first display 61 is created.
  In step S700-4, the main CPU 110a turns on, blinks, or turns off the LED of the normal symbol first display 62 based on the normal symbol variation display data or the normal symbol stop display data set in the normal symbol variation process. The normal symbol first display display control data corresponding to the normal symbol display signal is generated.
  In step S700-5, the main CPU 110a displays the special symbol hold display data (first special symbol hold display data) set in the first start port detection signal input process, the second start port detection signal input process, or the special symbol memory determination process. , Second special symbol hold display data), a special symbol hold display signal for turning on, blinking or turning off the LED of the first special symbol hold first display 63 or the second special symbol hold first display 64 The display control data for the special symbol hold first display corresponding to is created.
  In step S700-6, the main CPU 110a turns on, blinks, or turns off the LED of the normal symbol hold first display 65 based on the normal symbol hold display data set in the winning gate detection signal input process or the normal symbol change process. Display control data for the normal symbol hold first display corresponding to the normal symbol hold display signal to be generated.
  In step S700-7, the main CPU 110a turns on or off the LED of the round number display 66 based on the round number display data or the round number erasure data set in the special symbol stop process or the jackpot game end process. Display control data for the round number display corresponding to the round number display signal is created.
  In step S700-8, the main CPU 110a makes a right-handed display for turning on or off the LED of the right-handed first display 67 based on the right-handed display data or the right-handed erasure data set in the special symbol stop process. Display control data for the right-handed first display corresponding to the signal is created.
  In step S700-9, if the gaming state at the time of power restoration is the high probability gaming state, the main CPU 110a creates display control data for the high probability gaming state indicator for lighting the LED of the high probability gaming state indicator 68. To do.
  In step S700-10, the main CPU 110a creates display control data for the short-time game state indicator for lighting the LED of the short-time game state indicator 69 if the game state at the time of power recovery is the short-time game state.
  In step S700-11, the main CPU 110a generates external signal output data for outputting external information data (game information), information related to abnormality, RAM clear execution information (security signal), and the like to the outside of the gaming machine. Perform signal output data creation processing.
  Next, output control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing output control processing in the main control board 110.
  In Step S800-1, the main CPU 110a outputs the various drive control data created in Steps S700-1 to S700-2 in order to drive the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second start opening / closing solenoid 48b. Perform port output processing. Furthermore, external signal output data such as external information data (game information) created in step S700-11, information related to abnormality, and RAM clear execution information (security signal) are output to the game information output terminal board 108.
  In step S800-2, the main CPU 110a displays the first special symbol first indicator 60, the second special symbol first indicator 61, the normal symbol first indicator 62, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63, the first 2 special symbol hold first display 64, normal symbol hold first display 65, round number display 66, right-handed first display 67, high probability game state display 68, time-short game state display 69 LED In order to light up, turn off, or blink, display output processing for outputting various display control data created in steps S700-3 to S700-10 is performed.
  In step S800-3, the main CPU 110a transmits the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, and the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Command output processing to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 is performed.
(Command explanation)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to which the description is partially omitted in the flowchart of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 and 38 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.
  The “designation designating command” indicates the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, “MODE” is set as “E0H”, and DATA information is set according to the type of the special symbol. Since the special symbol type determines the jackpot type and the high probability gaming state as a result, it can be said that the effect symbol designation command indicates the jackpot type and the gaming state.
  In the effect symbol designation command, when various special symbols are determined and the variation display of the special symbol is started, an effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the effect designating command corresponding to the special symbol determined when the special symbol variable display is started in step S311-10 is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the effect designating command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  The “first special symbol memory designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area, “MODE” is set to “E1H”, and the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to the above.
  This first special symbol memory designation command is effect-controlled by the first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area increases or decreases in step S230-11 or step S310-7, the number corresponding to the holding memory number after increase / decrease is increased. One special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the first special symbol memory designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.
  The “second special symbol memory designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area, “MODE” is set to “E2H”, and the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to the above.
  This second special symbol memory designation command is directed by the second special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area in step S240-17 or step S310-7 increases or decreases, the number corresponding to the holding number after increase or decrease corresponds. Two special symbol storage designation commands are set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the second special symbol memory designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.
  In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol memory designation command” and the “second special symbol memory designation command” are collectively referred to as “special symbol memory designation command”.
  The “special symbol confirmation command” indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, “MODE” is set to “E3H”, and “DATA” is set to “00H”. This special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 in step S320-3, the special symbol confirmation command is used for the effect of the main RAM 110c. Set in the transmission data storage area. Thereafter, the special symbol confirmation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.
The “normal symbol determination command” indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, “MODE” is set to “E3H”, and “DATA” is set to “01H”.
The normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 62 in step S410-14, the normal symbol confirmation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the normal symbol confirmation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  The “first special symbol variation pattern designation command” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol first display 60, “MODE” is set to “E6H”, and various DATA information is set in accordance with the fluctuation pattern.
  The first special symbol variation pattern designation command is used for the first special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 is started. A variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S312-6, the first special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the first special symbol variation pattern designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.
  The “variable pattern designation command for the second special symbol” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol first display 61, and “MODE” is set to “E7H”. DATA information is set in accordance with the fluctuation pattern.
  The second special symbol variation pattern designation command is a second special symbol variation corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol first display 61 is started. A pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S312-6, the second special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the second special symbol variation pattern designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.
  In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol variation pattern designation command” and the “second special symbol variation pattern designation command” are collectively referred to as a “variation pattern designation command”.
  The “start winning designation command” is information for preliminarily determining the result of the jackpot lottery. If the game is based on winning a game ball to the first starting opening 45, “MODE” is set to “E8H”. If it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47, “MODE” is set as “E9H”, and DATA information is set according to various winning information.
  As for the start winning designation command, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, a starting winning designation command corresponding to the determined start winning information is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  Specifically, in step S230-10 or S240-16, a start winning designation command corresponding to the determined winning information is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the start winning designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.
  The “round designation command” indicates the number of jackpot rounds according to various jackpot types, “MODE” is set as “EAH”, and DATA information is set according to the number of jackpot rounds. .
  As for the round designation command, when the big hit round is started, a round designation command corresponding to the started round number is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, when the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is opened in step S340-5 or step S340-16, a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds to be opened is transmitted for production in the main RAM 110c. Set in the data storage area. Thereafter, the winning prize opening opening designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.
  The “opening designation command” indicates that various jackpot games (special game state) start, “MODE” is set as “EBH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot Yes.
  As for the opening designation command, when various jackpots start, an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game process in step S330-23, an opening designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the opening designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.
  The “ending designation command” indicates that various jackpots have ended, “MODE” is set as “ECH”, and DATA information is set according to the jackpot type.
  As for this ending designation command, when various jackpots are finished, the ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game end process in step S340-18, an ending designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the ending designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.
  The “common symbol designation command” indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 62, and “MODE” is set to “EDH”, and the DATA of the DATA according to the normal symbol type is set. Information is set.
  As for the normal symbol designation command, when various normal symbols are determined and the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the universal symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  Specifically, when the normal symbol variation display is started in step S410-9, a general symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, in step S <b> 800-3, the universal designating command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.
  The “ordinary pattern variation pattern designation command” indicates the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol first display 62, “MODE” is set to “EEH”, and is adjusted to the variation time of various ordinary symbols. DATA information is set.
  When the normal symbol variation display command of the normal symbol first display 62 is started, the normal symbol variation pattern designation command is the normal diagram variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation time of the ordinary symbol. 130. Specifically, when the normal symbol variation display is started in step S410-11, the ordinary variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation time of the ordinary symbol is transmitted in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Set to After that, the regular pattern change pattern designation command set in the production transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.
  The “ordinary symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the normal symbol hold count (G) storage area, “MODE” is set to “EFH”, and DATA is set in accordance with the hold memory count. Information is set.
  The normal symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the reserved symbol number stored in the normal symbol reserve number (G) storage area is switched. . Specifically, when the value stored in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area in step S14, step S250-7 or step S410-5 increases or decreases, the number of holding storage after the increase or decrease corresponds. The normal symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the normal symbol memory designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  The “gaming state designation command” indicates whether it is a short-time gaming state or a non-short-time gaming state, and “MODE” is set as “F1H”, and if it is a non-short-time gaming state, “DATA” is “ “00H” is set, and “DATA” is set to “01H” in the time saving gaming state.
  As for the gaming state designation command, a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state is transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the special symbol variation, at the end of the variation of the special symbol, at the start of the jackpot game and at the end of the jackpot. .
  Specifically, when the special symbol variation display is started in step S310-14, the high probability game flag, the high probability game count, the short-time game flag, and the short-time game count (J) are changed in step S330-13. When there is a possibility that a high probability game flag, a high probability game count, a time-short game flag, and a time-short game count (J) are set in step S350-6, the game state corresponding to the current game state The designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for presentation in the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, the gaming state designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  The “RAM clear designation command”, “power-on designation command”, and “power recovery designation command” indicate whether or not the power-on to the gaming machine 1 is to initialize the main RAM 110c. “MODE” is set to “F2H”, and when the main RAM 110c is initialized, “DATA” is set to “00H” and “01H”, and when the main RAM 110c is not initialized, “DATA” is set. It is set to “02H”.
  The RAM clear designation command, the power-on designation command, and the power restoration designation command are the RAM clear designation command, the power-on designation command, or the power restoration designation corresponding to whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  Specifically, the RAM clear designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on (step S8). The power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch is turned on again and the information stored in the main RAM 101c is cleared (step S12). The power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S7).
  The “error designation command” indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, “MODE” is set as “F3H”, and “DATA” information is set according to the type of error.
  This error designation command is used when a game ball is won in the second start opening 47, when detected by the magnetic detection switch 53a or the radio wave detection switch 54a, when detected by the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, when the glass frame 4 is opened, When the lower tray 12 is full, when a payout abnormality occurs, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  Specifically, when the magnetic / radio wave abnormality is determined in step S600, when the abnormal winning is determined in S260, or when the illegal entry is determined in S240-7, the payout control board 120 uses the glass frame 4 When the opening of the tray 12 is full, the shortage of game balls to be paid out is detected, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, in step S800-3, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.
  The “error release designation command” indicates that the error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, “MODE” is set to “F4H”, and “DATA” information is set in accordance with the type of error that has been resolved. Is set.
  As for this error release designation command, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the glass frame 4 is closed, when the tray 12 is fully filled, or when the payout abnormality is resolved.
  Specifically, when the payout control board 120 detects the closing of the glass frame 4, the fullness of the lower tray 12, and the shortage of game balls for payout are detected, the error cancellation corresponding to the type of error that has been canceled The designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for presentation in the main RAM 110c. Thereafter, in step S800-3, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130.
(Main process of production control unit 130m)
Processing executed by the sub CPU 130a in the effect control unit 130m will be described. First, the main process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing main processing in the effect control unit 130m.
  When a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 180, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.
  In step S1000, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting the timer interrupt, and performs an initialization process in step S1001. In this processing, the sub CPU 130a reads a main processing program from the sub ROM 130b in response to power-on, initializes a flag and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c, and performs processing such as initial setting.
  In step S1002, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission for permitting a timer interrupt, and in step S1003, performs a sub-random number update process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step S1003 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.
(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit 130m)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130m. A clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130m, thereby executing a timer interrupt process described below.
  In step S1100, the sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area.
  In step S1200, the sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. A specific description of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.
  When the effect control unit 130m receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m (not shown) occurs and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, the received command is analyzed in step S1200.
  In step S1300, the sub CPU 130a performs timer update processing for updating various timer counters used in the effect control unit 130m.
  In step S1400, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the signals of the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are input, and when the signals of the effect button detection switch 17a and the like are input, the image control unit 140. An effect input control process for transmitting an effect button signal or the like is performed.
  In step S1500, the sub CPU 130a performs special symbol second display 80, 81, normal symbol second display 82, special symbol hold second indicator 83, 84, normal symbol hold second display 85, and right-handed. Data creation processing of various display control data to be output to the second display 87 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S1600, the sub CPU 130a performs data output processing. In this process, a display output process for outputting a signal such as the display control data created in S700 is performed. Also, command output processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S1700, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a.
(Command analysis process of effect control unit 130m)
The command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described using FIG. 41 and FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing command analysis processing (1) in the effect control unit 130m. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing command analysis processing (2) in the effect control unit 130m. Note that the command analysis process (2) of FIG. 42 is performed subsequent to the command analysis process (1) of FIG.
  First, in step S1201, the sub CPU 130a checks whether there is a command in the reception buffer, and checks whether the command has been received. In this process, if there is a command in the reception buffer, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1202. On the other hand, in this process, if there is no command in the reception buffer, the sub CPU 130a ends the current command analysis process.
  In step S1202, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1203. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1204.
  In step S1203, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect process. Specifically, a customer-waiting demo image is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub-liquid crystal) 71 30 seconds after receiving the customer wait state designation command, or power saving is in progress. Or display an image. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  In step S1204, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1205. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a special symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1206.
  In step S1205, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the special figure pending memory number from the special symbol memory designation command, and sets the analyzed special figure pending memory number in the special figure pending memory number counter of the sub RAM 130c. I do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  In step S1206, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start winning designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a start winning designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1207. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a start winning designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1208.
In step S1207, the sub CPU 130a performs a hold icon display mode determination process for determining the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 based on the content of the start winning designation command. Specifically, from the start winning designation command, the variation display result and the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the command are specified, and the change scenario for changing the display mode of the hold icon according to the expectation that is a big hit is determined. To do. For example, the hold icon is displayed in white in the normal (default) display mode, blue in the special display mode 1, green in the special display mode 2, and red in the special display mode 3, and the expected degree of jackpot The normal display mode (white) <special display mode 1 (blue) <special display mode 2 (green) <special display mode 3 (red).
Then, a hold icon display designation command for displaying the determined hold icon on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  Note that the hold icon display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process in step S1600. Then, a hold icon based on the hold icon display designation command is displayed by the image control unit 140.
  In step S1208, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect designating command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect designating command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1209. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not an effect designating command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1210.
  In step S1209, the sub CPU 130a performs stop symbol data determination processing for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 based on the content of the received effect symbol designation command.
  In this stop symbol data determination process, the presentation symbol designation command is analyzed to determine stop symbol data (hit symbol data, lost symbol data) for identifying the presence / absence of jackpot and the type of jackpot, and the determined stop symbol Data is set in the stop symbol storage area of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  In step S1210, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1211. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1213.
  In step S1211, the sub CPU 130a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 to 47 and changes the effect mode (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern designation command and the effect random number value. decide. A specific description of the variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. A specific description of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47.
  Then, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined effect pattern in the symbol effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and determines the determined effect pattern in the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. In order to transmit, the effect pattern data indicating the effect pattern stored in the effect pattern storage area is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.
  In step S1212, the sub CPU 130a controls the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9 and the like based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S1211. A notice effect determining process for determining a notice effect to be performed is performed. A specific description of the notice effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  In step S1213, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol confirmation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol determination command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1214. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a symbol determination command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1216.
  In step S1214, the sub CPU 130a displays the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in order to stop and display the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). A stop designation command for stopping display is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the special symbol stop display data (the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 for stopping display) (1) Special symbol stop display data and (2) Special symbol stop display data) are set in a predetermined processing area. Thus, when the first special symbol stop display data or the second special symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. Thus, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol second indicator 80 or the second special symbol second indicator 81.
  The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process in step S1600. Then, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2) is stopped and displayed by the image control unit 140 ( This is stopped).
  In step S1215, the sub CPU 130a performs an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode for changing the effect mode in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, and the like. . Here, the first effect mode (normal mode) or the second effect mode (MV mode) is established when a mode change condition such as the number of variable displays reaching a predetermined number or winning the mode change lottery is satisfied. ) Is set. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends. The first effect mode and the second effect mode are set in the normal gaming state, but may be set in other gaming states.
  In step S1216, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol storage designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1217. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a normal symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1218.
  In step S1217, the sub-CPU 130a analyzes the normal symbol reserved memory number from the normal symbol memory designation command, and displays the analyzed normal symbol reserved memory number on the normal symbol reserved second display 85. Is stored in a predetermined processing area. Thus, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. The normal symbol holding number is displayed on the display unit 85.
  In step S1218, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a common map variation pattern designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1219. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1220 if the command stored in the reception buffer is not the usual pattern change pattern designation command.
  In step S1219, the sub CPU 130a performs normal roulette effect determination performed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, and the sub CPU 130a performs normal symbol second display. A normal roulette effect determination process is performed in which normal symbol variation display data for causing the normal symbol variation display (blinking of the LED) to be performed in 83 is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is generated in step S1500, and the generated data is output in step S1600, whereby the normal symbol second display is performed. The change display of the device 83 is started. Note that the normal roulette effect is an effect that is performed when the short-time game state is the non-short-time game state. Specifically, the stop symbol data of the normal symbol becomes the normal symbol 1 and the auxiliary game is performed. This is a preliminary production that makes the player expect that. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  In step S1220, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol determination command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol determination command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1221. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1223 if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a normal symbol determination command.
  In step S1221, normal symbol variation stop processing is performed in which normal symbol stop display data for stopping and displaying the normal symbol second display 82 is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is generated in step S1500, and the generated data is output in step S1600, whereby the normal symbol second display is performed. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the device 82.
  In step S1222, the sub CPU 130a performs a long opening effect execution process for effecting that the second start port 47 is opened longer than usual. In this long opening effect execution processing, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary symbol is played with the normal symbol stop symbol data becoming the normal symbol 1, and the normal symbol stop symbol data becomes the normal symbol 1 and the auxiliary game is executed. The long opening effect is executed when When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  In step S1223, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1224. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a gaming state designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1225.
  In step S1224, the sub CPU 130a sets the data indicating the gaming state based on the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area in the sub RAM 130c, and the gaming state based on the received gaming state designation command is the short-time gaming state. If the game state is not a special game state (a big hit game state), a game state in which right-handed erase data for erasing (LED off) the display of the right-handed second display 87 (LED on) is set in a predetermined processing area Perform the setting process. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends. Thus, when right-handed erasure data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. The display of 87 is erased.
  In step S1225, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot opening designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1226. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not an opening designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1227.
  In step S1226, the sub CPU 120a performs a jackpot effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot effect pattern. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the jackpot effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65, and determines a jackpot effect mode (a jackpot effect pattern) based on the opening designation command. The specific description of the jackpot effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. A specific description of the jackpot effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  In step S1227, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1228. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1229 if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a round designation command.
  In step S1228, the sub CPU 130a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern. In this round effect pattern determination process, a round effect pattern is determined based on the round designation command and the jackpot effect pattern determined in step S1226, the determined round effect pattern is set in the round effect pattern storage area, and the determined round effect is determined. In order to transmit the pattern information to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, a round effect pattern designation command based on the determined round effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  Note that the round effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 generate a round effect corresponding to the round effect pattern designation command (round effect pattern) in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.
  In step S1229, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot ending designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot ending designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1230. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1231 if the command stored in the reception buffer is not an ending designation command.
  In step S1230, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot end effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot end effect pattern. In this jackpot end effect pattern determination process, a jackpot end effect pattern is determined based on the ending designation command for jackpot, the determined hit end effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and information on the determined hit end effect pattern is obtained. In order to transmit to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, a jackpot end effect pattern designation command based on the determined jackpot end effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  Note that the jackpot end effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. The Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display a jackpot end effect corresponding to the jackpot end effect pattern designation command (a jackpot end effect pattern) in the first image display device (main liquid crystal). ) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like.
  In step S1231, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an error designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is an error designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1232. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not an error designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1233.
  In step S1232, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process for notifying that an error (event) related to the security of the gaming machine 1 has occurred. In this error notification process, the type of error designation command, that is, the type of error that has occurred is determined, an error notification effect corresponding to the type of error that has occurred is determined, and the determined error notification effect is stored in the error notification effect storage area. In order to transmit the determined error notification effect information to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, an error notification designation command based on the determined error notification effect is transmitted to the sub-RAM 130c. Set to send buffer. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  Note that the error notification designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 generate an error notification effect corresponding to the error notification designation command in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display device. (Sub-liquid crystal) 71, sound output device 9, board illumination device 74, frame illumination device 10, board drive device 75, etc.
  In step S1233, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an error cancellation designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is an error cancellation designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1234. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not an error cancellation designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1235.
  In step S1234, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification canceling process for canceling an error notification that is already being executed. In this error notification cancellation processing, the type of error cancellation designation command, that is, the type of error that has been resolved, is determined, and the error notification rendering corresponding to the resolved error type is cleared from the error notification rendering storage area, and the error notification that has been resolved. In order to transmit the release information of the effect to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, an error notification cancellation designation command based on the canceled error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. . When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  Note that the error notification cancellation designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 end the error notification effect corresponding to the error notification cancellation designation command.
  In step S1235, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a RAM clear designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a RAM clear designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1236. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a RAM clear designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1237.
  In step S1236, the sub CPU 130a performs a RAM clear process for notifying that the RAM clear switch is turned on (pressed) and the power is turned on. In this RAM clear process, until the RAM clear is turned on (pressed) again, information on the RAM clear notification effect for notifying that the RAM clear is being prepared is displayed as the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, In order to transmit to the drive control unit 170, a RAM clear notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  Note that the RAM clear notification designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the RAM clear effect corresponding to the RAM clear notification designation command in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display. The device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the sound output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.
  In step S1237, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a power-on designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a power-on designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1238. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a power-on designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1239.
  In step S1238, the sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing for notifying that the RAM clear switch is turned on again and the information stored in the main RAM 101c is cleared. In this power-on process, the RAM is cleared and information on the power-on effect for notifying that the power is turned on is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. The input notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  Note that the power-on notification designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . The image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the power-on effect corresponding to the power-on notification designation command in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display. The device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the sound output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.
  In step S1239, the sub CPU 130a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a power supply restoration designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is a power recovery designation command, the sub CPU 130a moves the process to step S1240. On the other hand, in this process, if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a power supply restoration designation command, the sub CPU 130a ends the current effect control unit command analysis process.
  In step S1240, the sub CPU 130a performs a power recovery process for notifying that the RAM clear switch is not turned on (pressed) and that the power is turned on (power recovery). This power restoration process transmits power restoration effect information for notifying that power is being restored to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current production control unit command analysis process ends.
  Note that the power recovery designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the power restoration effect corresponding to the power restoration designation command in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display device. (Sub-liquid crystal) 71, sound output device 9, board illumination device 74, frame illumination device 10, board drive device 75, etc.
(Special drawing hold memory update process of production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 43, the special figure hold memory update process of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing special figure hold memory update processing in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step S1205-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the contents of the special symbol storage designation command determined to have been received in step S1204. In step S1205-2, the special symbol storage designation command confirmed in step S1205-1. The special symbol reservation number is set in the special figure reservation storage number counter of the sub-RAM 130c based on the contents of.
  In step S1205-3, the sub CPU 130a displays the first special symbol hold number or the second special symbol hold number on the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 or the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 (LED First special symbol hold display data or second special symbol hold display data for lighting or blinking) is set in a predetermined processing area. Accordingly, when the first special symbol hold display data or the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. As a result, the first special symbol hold number or the second special symbol hold number is displayed on the first special symbol hold second display 83 or the second special symbol hold second display 84.
In step S1205-4, the sub CPU 130a displays the first hold number display area SH1.
Alternatively, in order to display the first hold number or the second hold number in the second hold number display area SH2, the first hold number or the second hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 or the second hold number display area SH2. A special symbol hold number display designation command for display is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current special figure hold storage update process is terminated.
  The special symbol reservation number display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 displays the first hold number or the second hold number in the first hold number display area SH1 or the second hold number display area SH2. If the power restoration effect is being performed, the first hold number or the second hold number is restored and displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 or the second hold number display area SH2 after a predetermined time has elapsed.
(Change control pattern determination process of effect control unit)
The variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the changing effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step S1211-1, the sub CPU 130a stores the variation pattern designation command determined to have been received in step S1210 in the variation pattern designation command area of the storage area of the presentation information in the sub RAM 130c. That is, the variation pattern designation command that has been stored in the storage area for the production information is overwritten by a new variation pattern designation command.
  In step S1211-2, the sub CPU 130a confirms the content of the variation pattern designation command stored in step S1211-1, and acquires a random effect pattern determination random value in step S1211-2.
  In step S <b> 1211-4, the sub CPU 130 a determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is due to a game ball entering the first start port 45. If it is due to the game ball entering the first start opening 45 (S1211-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1211-5. On the other hand, if it is not due to the game ball entering the first start opening 45 (S1211-4: No), the process proceeds to step S1211-9.
  In step S1211-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires the current effect mode information set in the effect mode setting process in step S1215.
  In step S1211-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect mode information acquired in step S1211-5 is effect mode 1 (normal mode). If the effect mode information is effect mode 1 (normal mode) (S1211-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1211-7. On the other hand, if the effect mode information is not effect mode 1 (normal mode) (MV mode described later) (S1211-6: No), the process proceeds to step S1211-8.
  In step S1211-7, the sub CPU 130a selects the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode 1 shown in FIG. 45, and in step S1211-8, the sub CPU 130a changes the effect effect pattern pattern for effect mode 2 shown in FIG. The determination table is selected, and in step S1211-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the variation effect pattern determination table for the second start opening shown in FIG. The variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 1, the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 2, and the variation effect pattern determination table for the second start port are stored in the sub-RAM 130c. 45 to 47 to be described later
  In step S1211-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a variation effect pattern. Specifically, the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol storage area in step S1209 is compared with the random effect pattern determination random value acquired in step S1211-3 and the selected variable effect pattern determination table. The variation effect pattern is determined according to the selection rate set in the variation effect pattern determination table, and the determined variation effect pattern is stored in the variation effect pattern information storage area.
  The variation production pattern includes a variation production time, a variation display mode of the production symbol 70a, presence / absence of reach production, contents of reach production, presence / absence of production button production, contents of production button production, production development configuration, etc. Components are associated. In addition, the variation effect pattern of the variation effect in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is composed of a display mode of the effect symbol variation display, a character, and the like. Display modes relating to the object image and the background image are also associated as components of the variation effect.
  In step S1211-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies a variation effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern, and sets the identified variation effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.
  The variation effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process in step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display a variation effect corresponding to the variation effect pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.
  In step S1211-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect time, which is the effect time corresponding to the variable effect pattern determined in step S1211-1-10, in the variable effect timer counter of the sub RAM 130c. The CPU 130a sets the variation effect data corresponding to the variation effect pattern in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 130c.
  The variable effect timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S1200. The sub CPU 130a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the variation effect was started, by the variation effect timer counter.
  In step S1211-114, the sub CPU 130a performs a hold icon display update process. Specifically, the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is changed based on the hold icon change scenario determined in the hold icon display mode determination process in step S1207. Whether or not and the display mode after the change are determined, the pending icon change designation command corresponding to this decision is specified, and the specified pending icon change designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.
  The pending icon change designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process in step S1600. Then, the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the image control unit 140 (hold change notice is executed).
  In Step S1211-15, the sub CPU 130a performs the change icon display mode determination process. Specifically, based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S1211-10, whether or not to change the display mode of the variation icon displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and after the change. The display mode is determined, the variable icon designation command corresponding to the determination is identified, and the identified variable icon designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current variation effect pattern determination process ends.
  The variable icon designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process in step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 displays the variation icon in a display mode corresponding to the variation icon designation command (hold change notice is executed).
  In step S1211-16, the sub CPU 130a displays special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 to perform special symbol variation display (LED blinking). Is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. The variable display on the second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is started.
  In step S1211-1, the sub CPU 130a issues a special symbol variation display designation command for variably displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol in order to variably display the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Set to the send buffer.
  Note that the special symbol variation display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 performs variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 or the second special symbol display area DZ2.
(Variation production pattern determination table)
45 to 47 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when a variation effect pattern is determined. FIG. 45 shows the determination of the variation effect pattern for effect mode 1 that is referred to when the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are displayed in a variable manner by entering a game ball into the first start opening 45 in the effect mode 1 (normal mode). FIG. 46 is a table for the effect mode 2 that is referred to when the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are displayed in a variable manner by entering a game ball into the first start opening 45 in the effect mode 2 (MV mode). 47 is a variation effect pattern determination table, and FIG. 47 shows a determination of a variation effect pattern for the second start port that is referred to when the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are displayed in a variable manner by entering a game ball into the second start port. It is a table.
  The variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 to 47 includes stop symbol data specified by the effect symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern identified by the variation pattern designation command, and a variation pattern designation command. The selection ratio based on the random effect pattern determination random number to be acquired is associated with a variation effect pattern that is a variation effect (including a variation display of the effect symbol) performed in response to the variation display of the special symbol.
  What is described as pseudo 0, pseudo 2, pseudo 3, pseudo 4 in () in the column of the fluctuation production content (variation production pattern) means “the number of times of execution of pseudo continuous notice”. “Continuous notice” means that during the change display of the special symbol corresponding to one big win lottery, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and then changed again, and the change of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed a plurality of times. This means a notice according to the variation mode to be performed. It should be noted that the number of pseudo consecutive times is 0 when the change of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed only once, and the number of pseudo consecutive times is two when the change of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed twice. Thus, the number of pseudo consecutive times is 3 when the variation of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed three times, and the number of pseudo consecutive times is 4 when the variation of the effect symbol 70a and the temporary stop are performed four times. . Then, pseudo 0 has 0 pseudo-continuations, pseudo 2 has 2 pseudo-continuations, pseudo 3 has 3 pseudo-continuations, and pseudo 4 has 4 pseudo-continuations. Note that the number of pseudo consecutive times is executed only when the stop symbol data is the special symbol 10, the special symbol 11 or the special symbol 12, and if the pseudo consecutive number is executed four times, the probability variation is a big hit. It is fixed. In the present embodiment, the execution control board 130 (sub CPU 130a) side determines whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is executed and the pseudo continuous number of times, but the main control board 110 (main CPU 110a) side determines the execution control. You may make it notify to the board | substrate 130 (sub CPU130a). In addition, the pseudo-continuous notice is not executed when the time of the variation effect pattern is 20 seconds or less, but the pseudo-continuous notice is executed within a range of 2 to 3 times that is not determined to be a probable big hit. You may make it do.
  In the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 1 (normal mode) shown in FIG. 45, the shortened variation effect (3 seconds) associated with the variation pattern 2 (short variation) and the variation pattern 3 (normal variation) are associated. Normal fluctuation short effect attached (10 seconds), Normal fluctuation long effect linked to fluctuation pattern 1 (normal fluctuation) (12 seconds), Special long fluctuation effect linked to fluctuation pattern 4 (normal reach) (20 Seconds) and normal reach production (20 seconds), character short SP reach production (35 seconds) linked to fluctuation patterns 5, 6, 11 and 12 (SP reach 1 and 2), music short SP reach production (35 seconds) And chance short SP reach production (35 seconds), character long SP reach production linked to fluctuation patterns 7 and 13 (SP reach 3) (40 seconds) Character short SPSP reach production (50 seconds) linked to music long SP reach production (40 seconds) and chance long SP reach production (40 seconds), variation patterns 8, 9, 14 and 15 (SPSP reach 1 and 2) And music short SPSP reach production (50 seconds), character long SPSP reach production (60 seconds), music long SPSP reach production (60 seconds), fluctuation pattern 17 ( There are 16 types of variation effect patterns such as a character short full rotation reach effect (90 seconds) linked to (full rotation reach).
  In the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 2 (MV mode) shown in FIG. 46, the shortened variation effect (3 seconds) associated with the variation pattern 2 (shortening variation) and the variation pattern 3 (normal variation) are associated. Normal fluctuation short effect attached (10 seconds), Normal fluctuation long effect linked to fluctuation pattern 1 (normal fluctuation) (12 seconds), Special long fluctuation effect linked to fluctuation pattern 4 (normal reach) (20 Seconds) and normal reach production (20 seconds), music short SP reach production (35 seconds) and chance short SP reach production (35 seconds) linked to fluctuation patterns 5, 6, 11 and 12 (SP reach 1 and 2) , Music Long SP Reach Production (40 seconds) and Chance Long SP Reach Production (40 seconds) linked to Variation Patterns 7 and 13 (SP Reach 3) Music short SPSP reach effect (50 seconds) linked to the variation patterns 8, 9, 14 and 15 (SPSP reach 1 and 2), song long SPSP reach linked to the variation patterns 10 and 16 (SPSP reach 3) Twelve types of variation effect patterns are set, such as production (60 seconds) and variation pattern 17 (full rotation reach), a music short full rotation reach effect (90 seconds).
  The variation effect pattern determination table for the second start port shown in FIG. 47 has a shortened variation effect (3 seconds) associated with variation pattern 2 (shortened variation) and a normal associated with variation pattern 3 (normal variation). Fluctuating short effect (10 seconds), normal fluctuation long effect (12 seconds) linked to fluctuation pattern 1 (normal fluctuation), special long fluctuation effect (20 seconds) linked to fluctuation pattern 4 (normal reach), and normal reach Production (20 seconds), Special Short Reach Production 1 (40 seconds), Special Short Reach Production 2 (40 seconds) and Special Short Reach Production 3 (40 seconds) linked to Fluctuation Patterns 7 and 13 (SP Reach 3) , Special long reach production 1 (60 seconds), special long reach production 2 (60 seconds) and special batters linked to fluctuation patterns 10 and 16 (SPSP reach 3) Gurichi effect 3 (60 seconds), the fluctuation pattern 17 (full rotation reach) 12 kinds such special full rotation reach demonstration that tied (90 seconds) of the variation performance pattern is set.
  In the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, the expectation value (expected degree) in which the above-described music-based reach effect is larger than the above-described character-based reach effect is set to be higher. The character short SP reach production, the character long SP reach production, the character short SPSP reach production, the character long SPSP reach production, and the character short full rotation reach production are set in the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. Because it is not done, it is a reach production dedicated to production mode 1.
  The music short full rotation reach effect set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is not set in the change effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. It can be said.
  The special reach effects set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 are not set in the change effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. It is an effect variation pattern dedicated to the variation display based on the entry of game balls. In addition, a pseudo-continuous notice is always executed for special reach production. In this way, in the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 47, the variation effect pattern is set so that it can be distinguished from the variation effect pattern of the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 45.
  For the chance short SP reach effect and the chance long short SP reach effect set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the stop symbol data is the special symbol 18 (losing) and the special symbol 14 (suddenly probable big hit). ) Is selected only in the case of. That is, the chance-based SP reach production can be said to be a dedicated variation production pattern for producing (speaking) whether or not a sudden probability variation jackpot is generated. It should be noted that the chance display reach determination is not set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 because the probability display is not suddenly generated in the variation display based on the game ball entering the second start port 47.
  Also, in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, when the expected value (expected degree) that is a big hit is high, the music-type reach effect is more easily selected than the character-type reach effect, and the expected value (expected) The higher the degree), the easier the pseudo-continuous notice is executed. In the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46, the pseudo-continuous notice is more easily executed as the expected value (expected degree) that is a big hit is higher, and the pseudo continuous notice is executed as the expected value (expected degree) that is a bigger hit is higher. Reach production with a large number of times is easily selected. Further, in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, the higher the expected value (expected degree) that is a big hit when the special short reach effects 1 to 3 are determined, the higher the special short reach effect 1 <the special short reach effect 2 <. The selection rate increases in the order of special short reach production, and the higher the expected value (expectation) that is a big hit when the special long reach production is determined, the higher the special long reach production 1 <special long reach production 2 <special long reach The selection rate is set to increase in the order of production 3.
(Preliminary effect determination process of effect control unit)
The notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step S1212-1, the sub CPU 130a selects the notice type determination table shown in FIG. 49, and in step S1212-2, the sub CPU 130a selects the variation stored in the variation pattern information storage area in step S1211-1. Obtain production pattern information. Note that the notice type determination table is stored in the sub-RAM 130c, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S1212-3, the sub CPU 130a performs a notice effect type determination process. Specifically, a random number value for determining the notice type is acquired, the random number value for determining the notice type, the notice type determining table selected in Step S1212-1 and the variation effect pattern information acquired in Step S1212-2. Are determined, the notification type is determined according to the selection rate set in the notification type determination table, and the determined notification type is stored in the notification type information storage area.
  In step S1212-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice type is determined to be the symbol notice effect. If it is determined that the symbol notice effect has been determined (S1212-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-5. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol notice effect has not been determined (S1212-4: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-8.
  In step S1212-5, the sub CPU 130a selects the symbol notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 50, and in step S1212-6, the sub CPU 130a performs a symbol notice pattern determination process. Specifically, a random number value for determining the notice mode is acquired, the random number value for determining the notice mode, the symbol notice mode determining table selected in step S1212-5, and the variation effect pattern acquired in step S1212-2. Are determined, a symbol warning pattern (symbol warning mode) is determined according to the selection rate set in the symbol warning mode determination table, and the determined symbol warning pattern is stored in the warning pattern information storage area.
  In step S1212-7, the sub CPU 130a specifies a symbol notice pattern designation command corresponding to the determined symbol notice pattern, and sets the identified symbol notice pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current notice effect determination process ends.
  Note that the symbol notice pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process in step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 give a symbol preview effect corresponding to the symbol preview pattern designation command (variable effect pattern) to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.
  In step S1212-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice type is determined to be the music notice effect. If it is determined that the music preview effect has been determined (S1212-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-9. On the other hand, if it is determined that the music preview effect has not been determined (S1212-8: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-14.
  In step S1212-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a) is a big hit. If it is determined that the game is a big hit (S1212-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot will not be reached (S1212-9: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-10.
  In step S1212-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the music preview mode determination table for loss shown in FIG. 53, and in step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a selects the music preview mode determination table for jackpot shown in FIG. To do. Details of the music notice mode determination table in FIGS. 53 and 54 will be described later.
  In step S1212-2, the sub CPU 130a performs music notice pattern determination processing. More specifically, a random number value for determining the notice mode is acquired, the random number value for determining the notice mode is compared with the music notice mode determining table selected in the above step S1212-10 or step S1212-11, and the music notice is determined. A music preview pattern (music preview mode) is determined according to the selection rate set in the mode determination table, and the determined music preview pattern is stored in the preview pattern information storage area.
  In step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a specifies a music notice pattern designating command corresponding to the determined music notice pattern, and sets the specified music notice pattern designating command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current notice effect determination process ends.
  Note that the music preview pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the music preview effect corresponding to the music preview pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.
  In step S1212-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice type is determined to be the step-up notice effect. If it is determined that the step-up notice effect has been determined (S1212-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-15. On the other hand, if it is determined that the step-up notice effect has not been determined (S1212-14: No), the current notice effect determination process ends.
  In step S1212-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is a big hit. If it is determined that the game will be a big hit (S1212-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-17. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot will not be reached (S1212-15: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-16.
  In step S1212-16, the sub CPU 130a selects the lost step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60 (a), and in step S1212-17, the sub CPU 130a selects the jackpot step shown in FIG. 60 (b). Select the advance notice mode determination table. Details of the step-up notice mode determination table in FIG. 60 will be described later.
  In step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a performs step-up notice pattern determination processing. Specifically, the random number value for determining the notice mode is acquired, the random number value for determining the notice mode is collated with the step-up notice mode determining table selected in Step S1212-16 or Step S1212-17, A step-up notice pattern (step-up notice mode) is determined according to the selection rate set in the up-notice form determination table, and the determined step-up notice pattern is stored in the notice pattern information storage area.
  In step S1212-21, the sub CPU 130a identifies a step up notice pattern designation command corresponding to the determined step up notice pattern, and sets the identified step up notice pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process ends, the current notice effect determination process ends.
  Note that the step-up notice pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. The Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 perform a step-up notice effect corresponding to the step-up notice pattern designation command (variable effect pattern) on the first image display device (main liquid crystal). ) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like.
(Notice type determination table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a notice type determination table that is referred to when the notice type is determined in the notice effect type determination process in step S1212-3. The notice type determination table corresponds to the change effect pattern, the selection rate based on the random number for determining the notice type acquired when the notice type is determined, and the notice type of the notice effect executed during the change effect using the change effect pattern. It is attached.
When the shortened variation effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, one of no notice, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and the symbol notice effect is selected. There is no.
When the normal variation short effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, any one of no notice, symbol notice effect, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate.
When the normal variation long effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, any one of no notice, symbol notice effect, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate.
When the normal reach effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, any of no notice, symbol notice effect, and music notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and the step-up notice effect is not selected.
When the special long variation effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, the music notice effect or the step-up notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and no notice and symbol notice effect are not selected. . In other words, it can be said that the notice effect is always executed.
If the character system reach production (character short SP reach production, character long SP reach production, character short SPSP reach production, character long SPSP reach production, character short full rotation reach production) is determined as the variation production pattern, The symbol notice effect is always selected, and no notice, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect are not selected.
In the case where the music system reach production (music short SP reach production, music long SP reach production, music short SPSP reach production, music long SPSP reach production, music short full rotation reach production) is determined as the variation production pattern, The music notice effect is always selected, and no notice, symbol notice effect, and step-up notice effect are not selected.
If the chance-type reach production (chance short SP reach production, chance long SP reach production) is determined as the variation production pattern, the step-up notice production is always selected, and there is no notice, design notice production, and music notice production. Is never selected.
When the special reach effect is determined as the variation effect pattern, the symbol notice effect is always selected, and the no notice, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect are not selected.
  Thus, it can be said that the notice effect is determined based on the stop symbol data and the variation pattern as a result of the jackpot lottery of the special symbol as a result of the special effect jackpot lottery. In addition, although the availability or the selection rate of the notice effect is biased for each variation effect pattern, it may be executed equally without being biased, or another bias method may be used.
(Design notice mode decision table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a symbol advance notice mode determination table that is referred to when the symbol advance notice pattern is determined in the symbol advance notice pattern determination process in step S1212-6. In the symbol announcement mode determination table, the variation effect pattern, the selection rate based on the random number value for announcement mode determination acquired when the symbol announcement pattern is determined, and the type of the symbol announcement pattern are associated with each other.
  The types of symbol preview patterns are set from symbol preview pattern 1 to symbol preview pattern 12, and the effect symbol of the display symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped or permanently stopped) on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is set. It is a notice effect that suggests type, color, etc.
The “symbol notice pattern 1” is a notice effect that displays suggestion information that suggests the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
The “symbol notice pattern 2” is a notice effect that displays suggestion information indicating the type of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. "Is a notice effect that displays suggestion information that suggests the type of medium symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
The “symbol notice pattern 4” indicates the color of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the color of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.
The “symbol notice pattern 5” indicates the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the color of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.
The “symbol notice pattern 6” suggests the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and obscure the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.
The “symbol notice pattern 7” indicates the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the color of the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.
The “symbol notice pattern 8” is a pseudo-sequential notice of the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area. It is a notice effect which displays suggestion information which suggests that it is a pseudo-continuous pattern to be made.
The “symbol notice pattern 9” indicates the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the type of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.
The “symbol notice pattern 10” indicates the color of the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the type of right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information.
The “symbol notice pattern 11” indicates that the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is a pseudo-continuous symbol that generates a pseudo-continuous notice, and This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information that suggests the type of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the area.
The “symbol notice pattern 12” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the middle symbol stopped and displayed in the central area, and stopped in the right area. This is a notice effect that displays suggestion information that suggests the right design.
  In addition, as a feature of the symbol notice mode determination table, the higher the expectation that the variation display (variation production pattern) of the special symbol (production design 70a) will be a big hit (special result mode), the more symbols are suggested. A symbol advance notice pattern in which a symbol to be stopped and displayed is more clearly suggested as the expectation level that the change display (variation effect pattern) of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a) becomes a big hit (special result mode) is high. Is easier to select. In addition, since the symbol notice pattern 12 is selected only when the full rotation reach effect is executed, it can be said that it is a notice effect that confirms the jackpot.
  According to the feature of the symbol notice mode determination table, the player is relieved by the number of stop symbols suggested by the suggestion information of the symbol notice effect and the content of the suggestion information. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for the symbol notice effect can be effectively obtained, and the interest of the game can be improved.
(Example of design notice effect)
51 and 52 are diagrams showing a timing chart of a symbol notice effect and an effect example. Specifically, FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect of the symbol notice effect when the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is executed by the variation effect pattern in which the reach does not occur, and FIG. 52 is a variation in which the reach occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the symbol notice effect in case the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed by an effect pattern.
First, FIG. 51 will be described.
FIG. 51A is a timing chart of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a when no reach occurs.
In the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol start varying display in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing T0. .
  Then, the left symbol temporarily stops in the left region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at a timing T2 after the timing T1 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the display of the effect symbol 70a. The right symbol temporarily stops in the right region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T4. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol are different types of symbols, and no reach has occurred.
  Thereafter, the middle symbol temporarily stops in the central region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing T6, and the left region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing T7. In the center area and the right area, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at this time, and the symbols are displayed until T8 is reached.
Hereinafter, the symbol notice effect will be described.
FIG. 51B is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 1 executed during the variable display in which the reach of FIG.
In the symbol notice effect by the symbol notice pattern 1, the left symbol suggestion information suggesting the left symbol stopped and displayed in the left area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 is displayed in the left area. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2.
FIG. 51 (c) is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 2 executed during the variable display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
In the symbol announcement effect by the symbol announcement pattern 2, the right symbol suggestion information indicating the right symbol stopped and displayed in the right region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 is displayed in the right region. Then, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4.
FIG. 51D is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 3 executed during the variable display in which the reach in FIG.
In the symbol notice effect by the symbol notice pattern 3, the middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 is displayed in the central area. And the display of middle symbol suggestion information is complete | finished at the timing of T6.
FIG. 51E is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 4 and 5 executed during the variable display in which the reach of FIG.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 4 and 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol suggestion information indicating the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 and in the right area. The right symbol suggestion information indicating the right symbol is displayed in the left region and the right region, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4.
FIG. 51 (f) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 6, 7, and 8 executed during the variable display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 6, 7 and 8 is stopped in the center area and the left symbol suggestion information suggesting the left symbol displayed in the left area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1. The middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the displayed middle symbol is displayed in the left region and the central region, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T6.
FIG. 51 (g) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 9, 10 and 11 executed during the variable display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 9, 10 and 11 is stopped in the right side area and the middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbol to be stopped and displayed in the central area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1. Right symbol suggestion information indicating the right symbol to be displayed is displayed in the center region and the right region, respectively. Thereafter, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T6.
FIG. 51 (h) is a diagram showing an example of effect by the symbol notice pattern 9.
At the timing of T1, as shown in (h1), the “?” Image that vaguely suggests the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area “7” images suggesting the above are displayed in the center area and the right area, respectively. At the timing of T2, the left symbol temporarily stops as shown in (h2), but the “?” Image and the “7” image do not change. At the timing of T4, as shown in (h3), the right symbol is temporarily stopped and the display of the “7” image is ended. At the timing of T6, as shown in (h4), the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and the display of the “?” Image is ended. After that, all symbols are fixedly displayed as shown in (h5) at the timing of T7.
Next, FIG. 52 will be described.
FIG. 51A is a timing chart of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a when reach occurs.
In the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol start varying display in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing T0. .
  Then, the left symbol temporarily stops in the left region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at a timing T2 after the timing T1 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the display of the effect symbol 70a. The right symbol temporarily stops in the right region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T4. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol, and reach occurs.
  Then, a predetermined reach effect is executed between T5 and T6, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped in the central area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T6, and the first image is displayed at the timing of T7. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit of the apparatus (main liquid crystal) 70, respectively, and the symbol is displayed until T8.
  Hereinafter, the symbol notice effect will be described, but (b), (c), and (e) are the same as (b), (c), and (e) in FIG.
FIG. 52D is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 3 executed during the variable display in which the reach of FIG.
In the symbol notice effect by the symbol notice pattern 3, the middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1 is displayed in the central area. Then, the display of the middle symbol suggestion information is ended although the middle symbol is not stopped at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started. Note that the display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.
FIG. 52 (f) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 6, 7, and 8 executed during the variable display in which the reach of (a) occurs.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 6, 7 and 8 is stopped in the center area and the left symbol suggestion information suggesting the left symbol displayed in the left area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1. The middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the displayed middle symbol is displayed in the left region and the central region, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started even though the middle symbol is not stopped. Note that the display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.
FIG. 52 (g) is a timing chart of the symbol notice patterns 9, 10, and 11 executed during the variable display in which the reach of (a) occurs.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice patterns 9, 10 and 11 is stopped in the right side area and the middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbol to be stopped and displayed in the central area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1. Right symbol suggestion information indicating the right symbol to be displayed is displayed in the center region and the right region, respectively. Thereafter, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started even though the middle symbol is not stopped. Note that the display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.
FIG. 52 (h) is a timing chart of the symbol notice pattern 12 executed during the variable display in which (a) reach occurs.
The symbol notice effect by the symbol notice pattern 12 is stopped and displayed in the center area and the left symbol suggestion information that suggests the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 at the timing of T1. The middle symbol suggestion information that suggests the middle symbol and the right symbol suggestion information that suggests the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area are the left symbol stop position, the middle symbol stop position, and the right symbol stop position, respectively. Is displayed. The display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4, and the middle symbol does not stop at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started. The display of medium symbol suggestion information ends. Note that the display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.
  In this way, in the case of the symbol advance notice pattern that displays the middle symbol suggestion information that suggests the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed last, if no reach occurs, the middle symbol suggestion information is displayed until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. When the reach occurs, the middle symbol suggestion information is displayed only until the start of the reach production, so that the middle symbol suggestion information does not hinder the reach production, It is possible to suppress the decay of the fun of the game.
  It is also possible to display each symbol suggestion information on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. In this case, the reach effect executed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is possible. Is no longer disturbed by the symbol suggestion information, so the middle symbol suggestion information may be displayed until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, all the symbol suggestion information may be displayed until the reach effect is finished.
FIG. 52 (i) is a diagram showing an example of the effect by the symbol notice pattern 12.
At the timing of T1, as shown in (i1), the “7” image indicating the left symbol stopped and displayed in the left region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the middle symbol stopped and displayed in the central region are displayed. The suggested “7” image and the “7” image suggesting the right design stopped and displayed in the right region are displayed in the left region, the center region, and the right region, respectively. At the timing of T2, as shown in (i2), the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and the display of the “7” image in the left region ends. At the timing of T4, as shown in (i3), the right symbol is temporarily stopped and the display of the “7” image in the right region is ended. At the timing of T5, as shown in (i4), the display of the “7” image in the central area ends with the start of the reach effect. At the timing of T6, all symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in (i5), and at the timing of T7, as shown in (i6), all symbols are confirmed and displayed as a big win.
(Music notice mode determination table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a losing music notice mode determining table that is referred to when determining a music notice pattern for a music notice effect in the music notice pattern determining process in step S1212-12. FIG. It is a figure which shows the music notice mode determination table for jackpots referred when determining the music notice pattern of a music notice effect in the music notice pattern determination process of step S1212-2.
  Note that the music preview effect is at least one of the effect display displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 and the music output from the audio output device 9. It is a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit (special result mode). In addition, the music preview effect can be rephrased as a specific effect.
  The lost song preview mode determination table of FIG. 53 and the jackpot music preview mode determination table of FIG. 54 include a variation effect pattern and a selection rate based on a random number value for determining the preview mode acquired when determining the track preview pattern. The type of the music preview pattern is associated. Note that the types of the music preview pattern are set from the music preview pattern 1 to the music preview pattern 28, and there are three types of music A to C used.
  In the following explanations, the words “Gase” and “Book” will appear, but “Gase” means that the music preview effect will not develop after that, and “Book” means that the song preview effect will develop after that. Means.
  “Music preview pattern 1” executes a gasse indication effect that only expects a music effect to be executed, which suggests that there is a possibility that a music-related reach effect may be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect. The music effect is an effect composed of a combination of the development suggestion effect display and any of the music pieces A to C.
  “Music notice pattern 2” is a gasses composed of a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the output of the song A after executing the present sign effect that the music effect is determined to be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect for executing the first music effect. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music A) is output.
  The “song notice pattern 3” is a notice effect that executes the second music effect that is a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the output of the song B after the sign effect is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. . That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music B) is output.
  The “song notice pattern 4” is a notice effect that executes the third sign effect of the gasse composed of a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the output of the song C after the real sign effect is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. is there. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music C) is output.
  The “music preview pattern 5” is a gassure reach effect (expansion effect and development effect) that only allows the development of a music-related reach effect after executing the present sign effect and the first music effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect that executes a reach reach effect). That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music A) is output.
  The “song notice pattern 6” is a notice effect that executes the gas leaches sign effect after executing the main sign effect and the second music effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music B) is output.
  The “song notice pattern 7” is a notice effect that executes the gassyrich predictive effect after executing the present sign effect and the third music effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music C) is output.
  The “song notice pattern 8” is a notice effect in which the reach sign effect is executed after the main sign effect and the first music effect are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music A) is output.
  The “music notice pattern 9” is a notice effect in which the reach indication effect is executed after the main sign effect and the second music effect are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music B) is output.
  The “music notice pattern 10” is a notice effect in which the reach indication effect is executed after the main indication effect and the third music effect are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music effect is executed once and one type of music (music C) is output.
  The “song notice pattern 11” executes the main sign effect and the Gasse first music effect during the variation display of the effect design 70a, and executes the pseudo-continuous effect that produces the fact that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated. It is a notice effect for executing the first music effect and the present reach sign effect. That is, although the music effect is executed twice, only one type of (music A) is output.
  The “music notice pattern 12” is a notice to execute the second sign effect and the second reach sign effect after executing the pseudo sign effect and the pseudo second effect effect during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a. Production. That is, although the music effect is executed twice, only one type of (music B) is output.
  The “music notice pattern 13” is a notice that the main sign effect and the Gasse third music effect are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and the third music effect and the reach predictive effect are executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Production. In other words, the music effect is executed twice, but only one type (music C) is output.
  The “music notice pattern 14” is a notice that executes the main sign effect and the first gasset music effect during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and executes the second music effect and the reach reach effect after executing the pseudo-continuous effect. Production. That is, the music effect is executed twice and two types of music (music A and B) are output.
  The “music notice pattern 15” is a notice that the main sign effect and the second music effect are performed during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and the third music effect and the reach reach effect are executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Production. That is, the music effect is executed twice and two types of music (music B and C) are output.
  The “music notice pattern 16” is a notice that the main sign effect and the Gasse third music effect are executed during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and the first music effect and the reach sign effect are executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Production. That is, the music effect is executed twice and two types of music (music C and A) are output.
  The “music notice pattern 17” executes the main sign effect, the first music composition effect and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect design 70a, and then executes the first music effect effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect that executes the first music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, although the music effect is executed three times, only one type of music (music A) is output.
  The “song notice pattern 18” performs the main sign effect, the gasse second music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the gase second music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the second music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, although the music effect is executed three times, only one type of music (music B) is output.
  The “music notice pattern 19” executes the main sign effect, the Gase third music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the Gase third music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the third music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, although the music effect is executed three times, only one type of music (music C) is output.
  The “song preview pattern 20” executes the main sign effect, the first gaze music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the first gaze music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the second music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music A and B) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music B) is delayed.
  The “music notice pattern 21” executes the main sign effect, the Gase second music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the Gase second music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the third music effect and the reach sign effect. In other words, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music B and C) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music C) is delayed.
  The “song preview pattern 22” executes the main sign effect, the gasse third music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the gase third music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect that executes the first music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music C, A) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music A) is delayed.
  The “song notice pattern 23” executes the main sign effect, the gasse first music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the gasse second music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the second music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music A and B) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music B) is at an early timing.
  The “song notice pattern 24” executes the main sign effect, the gasse second music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the gase third music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect for executing the third music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music B, C) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music B) is at an early timing.
  The “music notice pattern 25” executes the main sign effect, the Gase third music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the Gase first music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect that executes the first music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and two types of music (music C and A) are output, but the output of the second type of music (A) is at an early timing.
  The “music notice pattern 26” executes the main sign effect, the first gaze music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the second sound effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. It is a notice effect that executes the third music effect and the reach sign effect of development confirmation. That is, the music effect is executed three times and three types of music (music A, B, and C) are output.
  The “song notice pattern 27” executes the main sign effect, the gasse second music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the gasse third music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect that executes the first music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and three types of music (music B, C, A) are output.
  The “music notice pattern 28” executes the main sign effect, the Gase third music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, and then executes the Gase first music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. This is a notice effect that executes the first music effect and the reach sign effect. That is, the music effect is executed three times and three types of music (music C, A, B) are output.
  As a first feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, one kind of music is performed by executing one music effect among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. When the output music preview patterns 8 to 10 are executed, the expectation (reliability) that is a big hit in the order of the music preview pattern 8 <music preview pattern 9 <music preview pattern 10 is set to be higher. ing. That is, the output music has a high expectation (reliability) that is a big hit in the order of music A <music B <music C. Thereby, a player comes to be interested in the kind of the music to be output, and the interest regarding the music preview effect is improved.
  As a second feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, two kinds of music effects are executed and one kind of music is executed among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. When the music preview patterns 11 to 13 to be output are executed, the expectation (reliability) that is a big hit in the order of the music preview pattern 11 <music preview pattern 12 <music preview pattern <13 is set to be higher. Has been. That is, the output music has a high expectation (reliability) that is a big hit in the order of music A <music B <music C. Thereby, a player comes to be interested in the kind of the music to be output, and the interest regarding the music preview effect is improved.
  As a third feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, two kinds of music are performed by executing two music effects among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. When the music preview patterns 14 to 16 to be output are executed, the expectation level (reliability) that is a big hit in the order of the music preview pattern 14 <music preview pattern 15 <music preview pattern 16 is set to be higher. ing. That is, the expectation level (reliability) that becomes a big hit in the order of music A <music B <music C is increased for the music output in the first music production. Thereby, a player comes to be interested in the kind of the music to be output, and the interest regarding the music preview effect is improved.
  As a fourth feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, the music notice patterns 11 to 11 in which two music effects are executed among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. When 16 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) that the music preview patterns 14 to 16 in which two types of music are output is larger than the music preview patterns 11 to 13 in which only one type of music is output. Is set to be high. That is, the degree of expectation (reliability) that is a big hit is higher when two types of music are output than when only one type of music is output. Thereby, the player is expected to output many kinds of music and has a strong interest in the music preview effect, and the interest of the game is improved.
  As a fifth feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, among the music notice effects (specific effects) that can be a big hit, the music notice patterns 17 to 17 in which three music effects are executed. When 28 is executed, the expectation that the music preview patterns 20 to 25 in which two types of music are output is higher than the music preview patterns 17 to 19 in which only one type of music is output, Expectation (reliability) that the jackpot pattern 26-28 in which three types of music are output is higher than the music preview pattern 20-25 in which only two types of music are output. Thereby, the player is expected to output many kinds of music and has a strong interest in the music preview effect, and the interest of the game is improved.
  As a sixth feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, three kinds of music effects are executed among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit, but two kinds of music When the music preview patterns 20 to 25 that are only output are executed, the second kind of music production is performed in the second music production than the music notice patterns 20 to 22 in which the second kind of music is outputted in the third music production. The expectation level (reliability) that the jackpot pattern 23-25 from which the music is output becomes a big hit becomes higher. Thereby, the player is expected to output different types of music at an early stage and has a strong interest in the music preview effect, and the interest of the game is improved.
  As a seventh feature of the music notice mode determination table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, among the music notice effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit, the music notice patterns 8 to 10 in which the music effect is executed only once. Expectation (reliability) that the music preview patterns 11 to 16 in which the music performance is executed twice is larger than the music preview patterns 11 to 16 in which the music performance is executed only twice. In the music preview patterns 17 to 28 in which is executed three times, the expectation level (reliability) that is a big hit is higher. Accordingly, the player is expected to perform a large number of music effects, and has a strong interest in the music notice effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.
(Example of music preview effect)
55 to 59 are diagrams showing a timing chart of the music preview effect and an example of the effect. Specifically, FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a music preview effect in which a music effect described later is executed only once, and FIGS. 56 and 57 show a music preview effect in which a music effect described later is executed twice. 58 and 59 are diagrams showing a music notice effect in which a music effect to be described later is executed three times.
First, FIG. 55 will be described.
FIG. 55A is a timing chart of the music preview pattern 1.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the gasse sign effect are started. Note that the gasse sign effect is a notice effect that only expects (implies) the possibility that a music effect, which will be described later, is executed. Thereafter, the gasse sign effect is terminated at the timing of T1, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T2, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T3. As described above, in the music preview pattern 1, the music effect is not executed even once.
FIG. 55 (b) is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 2-4.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a and the present sign effect are started at the timing T0. The sign effect is a notice effect that confirms that the music effect is executed. Thereafter, the display of the development suggestion effect and the gasse music effect composed of any combination of the music pieces A to C are executed at the timing of T1. Note that the gasse music production is a non-developed notice production that is expected to develop into a reach sign production. Then, the gasse music effect is finished at the timing of T4, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T5, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T6. Thus, in the music notice patterns 2 to 4, the music effect is executed only once.
FIG. 55 (c) is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 5-7.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a and the present sign effect are started at the timing T0. Thereafter, the present music effect including a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the music A to C is executed at the timing of T1. In addition, this music production | presentation is a notice production which the development to a reach sign production is decided. Then, at the timing of T4, a gassure reach sign effect composed of a development effect and a reach effect is executed. In addition, the gasreach sign production is a notice development that does not develop enough to expect the development of a music-based reach production. Thereafter, the gasuleach sign effect is terminated at the timing of T7, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T8, and the effect symbol 70a is permanently stopped until the timing of T9. As described above, in the music preview patterns 5 to 7, the music effect is executed only once.
FIG. 55 (d) is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 8-10.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a and the main sign effect are started at the timing of T0, and the main musical effect effect including a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the music A to C is executed at the timing of T1. Then, at the timing of T4, the present reach sign effect comprising the development effect and the reach effect is executed. The reach indication effect is a notice effect in which the development of a music-type reach effect is finalized. Thereafter, the reach effect is started at the timing of T7, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T10, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T11. As described above, in the music preview patterns 8 to 10, the music effect is executed only once.
FIG. 55 (e) is a diagram showing an example effect produced by the music preview pattern 8.
FIG. 55 (e1) is an example of an effect during the sign effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the character information (“chansu?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Then, the development effect image (window) G3 shown in FIG. 55 (e2) is formed by the displayed effect image G1. Note that, in the case of the gaze indication effect, the development suggestion image (window) G3 is not formed, and the effect image G1 and the character information G2 disappear.
  FIG. 55 (e2) is an example of the production of the first music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. To produce a full screen. The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays history information (“Song A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player of the music output during the music preview effect. In the case of the first music production effect, the development suggestion image G3 disappears without becoming a full screen.
  FIG. 55 (e3) and FIG. 55 (e4) are examples of effects of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which character information (“Yosha! Yaruzo!”) Suggesting development is displayed on the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and then the production is performed. A reach squeak effect is performed that expects to be reached using the symbol 70a. Further, the history information G <b> 4 remains displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Note that the music notice effect by the music notice pattern 8 corresponds to the effects shown in FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e4), but may also be shown in FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e3), or FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e5). ).
  FIG. 55 (e5) is an example of a reach effect. Here, the music A output from the audio output device 9 in the music effect is output, and the character cuts the effect pattern 70a one after another on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. A display effect is performed. Note that the music output during the reach effect is not limited to the music A output as the music effect, and other music (for example, DF) may be selected at random and output. A plurality of music pieces are associated with each of C (for example, music piece G to I for music piece A, music pieces J to L for music piece B, and music pieces M to O for music piece C). May be output.
  FIG. 55 (e6) and FIG. 55 (e7) are examples of effects when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop). In FIG. 55 (e6), as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is displayed. Character information ("sorry") indicating that it is lost is displayed. In FIG. 55 (e7), the big hit result mode (“777”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 as a result of the variable display of the effect design 70a, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display). ) 71 is displayed character information indicating that it is a big hit ("sorry").
Next, FIG. 56 will be described.
FIG. 56 (a) is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 11-13.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a and the present sign effect are started at the timing of T0, and the display of the development suggestion effect and any one of the combinations of the music pieces A to C are executed at the timing of T1. Then, when the gasse music production is finished at the timing of T2, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T3. After that, a pseudo-continuous effect that produces the fact that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is executed at the timing of T4, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is resumed at the timing of T5. Then, the present music effect is executed at the timing of T6, and the actual reach sign effect is executed at the timing of T7. Then, this reach sign production is started at the timing of T7. Thereafter, the reach effect is started at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T9, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T10. As described above, in the music notice patterns 11 to 13, the music effect is executed twice.
FIG. 56 (b) is a diagram illustrating an effect example by the music notice pattern 11.
FIG. 56 (b1) is an example of the production of the sign effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the character information (“chansu?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. And the development suggestion image (window) G3 shown to (e2) is formed by the displayed effect image G1.
  FIG. 56 (b2) is an example of the production of the first music production effect. In the Gase 1st music production, the intro (introduction) portion of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in accordance with the rhythm of the music A An effect in which G3 expands is performed, and eventually disappears without becoming full screen. The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays history information (“Song A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player of the music output during the music preview effect.
  FIG. 56 (b3) is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect. Here, a pseudo-continuous effect in which a window G5 including character information indicating that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is performed, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) is displayed. ) 71, the history information G4 remains displayed.
  FIG. 56 (b4) is an example of the production of the first music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. To produce a full screen. In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect is updated (changed from "Music A" to "A → A").
  56 (b5) and FIG. 56 (b6) are examples of effects of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which character information (“Yosha! Yaruzo!”) Suggesting development is displayed on the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and then the production is performed. A reach squeak effect is performed that expects to be reached using the symbol 70a. Further, the history information G <b> 4 remains displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. The music notice effect by the music notice pattern 11 is the effect shown in FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b6), but may be shown in FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b5) or FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b). It may be up to b7).
  FIG. 56 (b7) shows an example of the reach effect. Here, the music A that was output last in the music effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the character cuts the effect design 70a one after another on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. Such display effects are performed. Note that the music output during the reach effect is not limited to the music A output as the music effect, and other music (for example, DF) may be selected at random and output. A plurality of music pieces are associated with each of C (for example, music piece G to I for music piece A, music pieces J to L for music piece B, and music pieces M to O for music piece C). May be output. It should be noted that the display effects of the reach effects may be different or the same for each piece of music output during the reach effects.
  FIG. 56 (b8) is an effect example when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in a lost result mode (temporary stop and main stop). Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is lost. Character information ("sorry") is displayed.
Next, FIG. 57 will be described.
FIG. 57 (a) is a timing chart when the music preview patterns 14 to 16 are executed. Note that the execution timings of the various effects executed in the music notice patterns 14 to 16 are the same as the timings of the various effects executed in the music notice patterns 11 to 13 shown in FIG. To do.
  FIG. 57 (b) is a diagram illustrating an effect example by the music notice pattern 14. Note that the production example by the music preview pattern 14 is also similar to the production example by the music preview pattern 8 shown in FIG. 55 except that the degree of expectation (reliability) that is a big hit is different, so only the different parts will be described. .
  FIG. 57 (b4) is an example of the production of the second music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. To produce a full screen. In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect is updated (changed from “Music A” to “A → B”).
  FIG. 57 (b5) is an example of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 displays thick character information (“Yoshi! Do you!”) That suggests development in the development suggestion image G3. Specifically, in order to increase the expectation for jackpots, the text information ("Yo Sha! I'll do!") Is made bold, but the display mode can be changed by changing the text color or the text background. Just do it.
  FIG. 57 (b8) is an effect example when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in a jackpot result mode (temporary stop and main stop). Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70 a, the big hit result mode (“777”) is stopped on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is big hit. Character information ("big hit") is displayed.
Next, FIG. 58 will be described.
FIG. 58 (a) is a timing chart when the music preview patterns 17 to 25 are executed.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a and the present sign effect are started at the timing of T0, and the display of the development suggestion effect and any one of the combinations of the music pieces A to C are executed at the timing of T1. Then, when the gasse music production is finished at the timing of T2, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T3. After that, a pseudo-continuous effect that produces the fact that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is executed at the timing of T4, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is resumed at the timing of T5. Then, the gaze music effect is executed at the timing of T6. Then, when the gasse music production is finished at the timing of T7, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T8. Thereafter, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at the timing of T9, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is resumed at the timing of T10. Then, the music production effect is executed at the timing of T11. Then, this reach sign production is started at the timing of T12. Thereafter, the reach effect is started at the timing of T13, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T14, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T15. As described above, in the music preview patterns 17 to 22, the music effect is executed three times.
FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing an example effect produced by the music notice pattern 20.
FIG. 58 (b1) is an example of the production of the sign effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the character information (“chansu?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. And the development suggestion image (window) G3 shown in (b2) is formed by the displayed effect image G1.
  FIG. 58 (b2) is an example of the production of the first music production effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. Production is performed, and eventually disappears without becoming full screen. The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays history information (“Song A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player of the music output during the music preview effect.
  FIG. 58 (b3) is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect. Here, a pseudo-continuous effect in which a window G5 including character information indicating that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is performed, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) is displayed. ) 71, the history information G4 remains displayed.
  FIG. 58 (b4) is an example of the production of the first music production effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. Production is performed, and eventually disappears without becoming full screen. In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect is updated (changed from "Music A" to "A → A").
  FIG. 58 (b5) is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect. Here, a pseudo-continuous effect in which a window G5 including character information indicating that the pseudo continuous notice has been successfully generated is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is performed, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) is displayed. ) 71, the history information G4 remains displayed.
  FIG. 58 (b6) is an example of the production of the second music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. To produce a full screen. In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect is updated (changed from “Music A” to “A → A → B”). The
  FIG. 58 (b7) and FIG. 58 (b8) are examples of effects of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which character information (“Yosha! Yaruzo!”) Suggesting development is displayed on the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and then the production is performed. A reach squeak effect is performed that expects to be reached using the symbol 70a. Further, the history information G <b> 4 remains displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. In addition, although the music notice effect by the music notice pattern 20 is an effect from (b1) to (b8), it may be (b1) to (b7) or may be from (b1) to (b9). .
  FIG. 58 (b9) shows an example of reach effect. Here, the music B output by the music production from the audio output device 9 is output, and the character cuts the production design 70a one after another by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. A display effect is performed. Note that the music that is output during the reach effect is not limited to the music B that is output during the music effect, and other music (for example, DF) may be selected and output at random. A plurality of music pieces are associated with each of C (for example, music piece G to I for music piece A, music pieces J to L for music piece B, and music pieces M to O for music piece C). May be output.
  FIG. 58 (b10) is an example of the effect when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop) in a lost result mode. Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is lost. Character information ("sorry") is displayed.
Next, FIG. 59 will be described.
FIG. 59A is a timing chart when the music preview patterns 26 to 28 are executed. Note that the execution timings of the various effects executed in the music preview patterns 26 to 28 are the same as the timings of the various effects executed in the music preview patterns 17 to 25 shown in FIG. Omitted.
  FIG. 59 (b) is a diagram showing an example effect produced by the music notice pattern 26. Note that the production example by the music notice pattern 28 is similar to the production example by the music notice pattern 20 shown in FIG. 58 except that the expectation level (reliability) is a big hit, so only the different parts will be described. .
  FIG. 59 (b4) is an example of the production of the second music production. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. To produce a full screen. In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect is updated (changed from “Music A” to “A → B”).
  FIG. 59 (b6) is an example of the production of the third music effect. Here, the intro (introduction) portion of the song C is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the song C. To produce a full screen. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 updates the display of history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview effect (change from “A → B” to “A → B → C”). Is done.
  FIG. 59 (b7) is an example of the effect of this reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 displays thick character information (“Yoshi! Do you!”) That suggests development in the development suggestion image G3. Specifically, in order to increase the expectation of jackpots, the text information ("Yoshisha! Yaruzo") is made bold, but the display mode can be changed by changing the text color or the text background. That's fine.
  FIG. 59 (b10) is an effect example when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in a jackpot result manner (temporary stop and main stop). Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70 a, the big hit result mode (“777”) is stopped on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is big hit. Character information ("big hit") is displayed.
  As described above, in the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment, the number of songs output during execution of the music preview effect (the type of music, the higher the expectation that a big hit game (special game state) will occur). The number of songs that are output during execution of the music preview effect (specific effect) is higher when the expectation that a big hit game (special game state) will occur is higher. (Music type, number of outputs) may be reduced. Further, although the type of music and the number of outputs are listed as the number of music, only one of them may be used.
  In the case of a variation effect pattern in which the reach state does not occur, the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment is from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol 70a until the effect symbol 70a temporarily stops temporarily. The music effect is performed in the meantime, but the music effect may be performed after the first temporary stop of the effect design 70a. In addition, a musical performance may be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 2 times) before the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, and the musical effect effect may be performed a predetermined number of times (1 to 2 times) after the temporary stop. .
  In the case of a reach variation effect pattern in which a reach state occurs, the music notice effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment is a song between the start of the change display of the effect symbol 70a and the occurrence of the reach state. Although the production is performed, the music production may be performed after the reach state occurs. Further, a music effect may be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 2 times) before the reach state occurs, and a music effect may be performed a predetermined number of times (1 to 2 times) after the reach state occurs.
  In addition, in the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment, the intro (introduction) part of the music A to C is output during the music effect, but the music is composed of a plurality of elements such as a melody part and a chorus part. If configured, the melody part may be used for the musical performance, or the chorus part may be used. Further, the types of music output during the music production are not limited to the three types A to C, and may be more or less. In addition, although the music production is performed intermittently, it may be performed continuously.
  Moreover, although the music notice effect (specific effect) of this embodiment is comprised by the combination of the output and display effect of a music, it is good also as only the output of a music. Further, in order to make it easier for the player to grasp the degree of expectation of entering the special gaming state, the history information of the music output during the music preview effect is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. The image may be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, or not displayed on either the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. May be.
  In addition, during the execution and / or non-execution of the music notice effect (specific effect), an explanation effect that explains what the music notice effect is like may be executed. Specifically, “the expectation that the jackpot will change depends on the number of songs to be output (type of song) will change”, and “the song preview will have a jackpot as the number of songs to be output (type of song) increases. Character information such as “It is highly possible” may be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71.
(Step-up notice mode determination table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table that is referred to when a step-up notice pattern is determined in the step-up notice pattern determination process in step S1212-18. Specifically, FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table for loss, and FIG. 60B is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table for jackpot.
  The step-up notice effect changes (changes) the step effect image displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 in a plurality of stages. ) To provide a notice effect for notifying that a predetermined specific effect will be executed. Further, the specific effect is an effect that expects to be a big hit (suddenly probable change), and can be paraphrased as an acquisition challenge effect for acquiring a big hit (suddenly probable change).
  In the step-up notice mode determination table for lost in FIG. 60 (a) and the step-up notice mode determination table for jackpot in FIG. 60 (b), the notice to be acquired when the variable effect pattern and the step-up notice pattern are determined. The selection rate based on the random number for mode determination is associated with the type of step-up notice pattern. The types of step-up notice effects are broadly classified into three types, step-up notice effects 1 to step-up notice effects 3, and step-up notice patterns in which branch numbers are assigned to the step-up notice effects 1 to 3. Is set more than once.
  The step-up notice effect 1 is a degree of expectation that a specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is executed on character information displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. This is a notice effect that changes stepwise (continuously or intermittently) according to the degree of expectation (reliability) or a sudden probability change big hit, and the maximum (final) number of steps (number of steps) is “3”. Is set to The execution of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is determined when the third step effect (stage effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps “3” is started.
  The step-up notice effect 2 is an expectation level (specific challenge effect) that a character image to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is executed (acquired challenge effect). (Reliability) or a sudden announcement change that changes step by step (continuous or intermittent) depending on the expectation (reliability) that will be a big chance of success, and the maximum number of steps (number of steps) is set to "4" ing. Even if the fourth step effect (stage effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps “4” is started, the execution of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the fourth step effect is executed to the end. Is set to
  The step-up notice effect 3 is a degree of expectation that a specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is executed on a telop image to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. (Reliability) or an unexpected effect that changes step by step (continuous or intermittent) according to the expectation (reliability) that suddenly becomes a big hit, and the maximum number of steps (number of steps) is set to “3” ing. Even if the third step effect (stage effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps “3” is started, the execution of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the third step effect is executed to the end. Is set to
  In the following description, the word “step up” may be expressed as “SU”. That is, the step-up notice effect may be expressed as an SU notice effect, the step-up notice mode determination table may be expressed as an SU notice mode determination table, and the step-up notice pattern may be expressed as an SU notice pattern.
  The “SU notice pattern 1-1” is a first method in which character information G1 corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 1 is gradually drawn on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect for executing a step effect.
  The “SU notice pattern 1-2” displays the character information G2 corresponding to step 2 of the SU notice effect 1 in the first image display after executing the first step effect of the SU notice effect 1 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect for executing a second step effect that is gradually drawn on the device (main liquid crystal) 70.
  The “SU notice pattern 1-3” is character information G3 corresponding to step 3 of the SU notice effect 1 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of the SU notice effect 1 during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. Is gradually drawn on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and after finishing the character information G3 in step 3, character information G4 (character information G1) indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end. This is a notice effect for executing the third step effect for displaying images of -3.
  The “SU notice pattern 2-1” is a first step in which the character image A corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 2 gradually appears on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. It is a notice effect that performs the effect.
  “SU notice pattern 2-2” is a first image display of character image B corresponding to step 2 of SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect of SU notice effect 2 during the dynamic display of effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect for executing the first step effect that gradually appears on the device (main liquid crystal) 70.
  The “SU notice pattern 2-3” is a character image C corresponding to step 3 of the SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of the SU notice effect 2 during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. Is a notice effect for executing a third step effect that gradually appears on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
  The “SU notice effect 2-4” is executed after the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 2 are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. The corresponding character information D gradually appears on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and is a notice effect for executing the fourth step effect A that ends without the character image D appearing completely.
  The “SU notice effect 2-5” is executed in step 4 of the SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 2 during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. The corresponding character information D gradually appears on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and this is a notice effect for executing the fourth step effect B in which the character image D appears completely.
  “SU notice pattern 3-1” is a first step in which the telop image A corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 3 is gradually displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. It is a notice effect that performs the effect.
  The “SU notice pattern 3-2” displays the first image of the telop image B corresponding to step 2 of the SU notice effect 3 after executing the first step effect of the SU notice effect 3 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect for executing a second step effect that gradually appears on the device (main liquid crystal) 70.
  The “SU notice pattern 3-3” is a telop image C corresponding to step 3 of the SU notice effect 3 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of the SU notice effect 3 during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. Is displayed in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 gradually, and the third step effect A is executed in which the telop image C ends without completely appearing.
  The “SU notice effect 3-4” is executed after the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 3 are executed during the variation display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a notice effect that causes the corresponding telop image D to gradually appear on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 to execute the third step effect A in which the telop image D appears completely.
  As the first feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, when the number of executed step effects is larger (3 or 4), the number of executed step effects is smaller (1 or 2). The expectation that the specific performance (acquired challenge performance) is executed is higher than that. Thereby, the player becomes interested in the number of step effects to be executed, and the interest related to the step-up notice effect and the interest of the game are improved.
  As a second feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, the expectation (reliability) that suddenly becomes a big hit in the order of step-up notice effect 1 <step-up notice effect 2 <step-up notice effect 3 is high. The point becomes. Thereby, the player becomes interested in the type of the step-up notice effect to be executed, and the interest related to the step-up notice effect and the interest of the game are improved.
  The third feature of the step-up notice mode determining table shown in FIG. 60 is that the start timing is delayed (the start timing is different) in the order of step-up notice effect 1 <step-up notice effect 2 <step-up notice effect 3. It is done. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player is expected to start the step-up notice effect. In addition, since the type of step-up notice effect executed depending on the start time of the step-up notice effect can be estimated, the interest of the game is improved. The start timing of the step-up notice effects 1 to 3 may be the same.
  As the fourth feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, step-up notice effects (SU notice effect 1 and SU notice effect 3) in which the final step (final stage) is set to “3”, and the final step The step-up notice effect (SU notice effect 2) in which (final stage) is set to “4” is set. Thereby, the number of steps in which the player has the most expectation for the development to the specific effect changes depending on the type of the step-up notification effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the step-up notification effect.
(Example of step-up notice effect)
61 to 63 are diagrams showing a timing chart of a step-up notice effect and an example effect. Specifically, FIG. 61 is a diagram showing step-up notice effect 1, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing step-up notice effect 2, and FIG. 63 is a diagram showing step-up notice effect 3.
First, FIG. 61 will be described.
FIG. 61A is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-1.
When the display of variation of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of the SU notice effect 1 is started at the timing of T1 (20th frame), and the first step effect is ended at the timing of T2, the T3 The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T4.
FIG. 61B is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-2.
Variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing T1. Then, the second step effect of the SU notice effect 1 is started at the timing T2, and when the second step effect is ended at the timing T5, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing T6, and the effect symbol is reached by the timing T7. 70a is stopped.
FIG. 61 (c) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-3.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, the first step effect is started at the timing T1, and the second step effect is started at the timing T2. Then, the third step effect (final step effect) of the SU notice effect 1 is started at the timing of T5, the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is started at the timing of T8 overlapping with the final stage part of the third step effect, When the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, the specific effect is ended at the timing T10, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing T11.
FIG. 61 (d) is a diagram illustrating an effect example by the SU notice pattern 1-3.
FIG. 61 (d1) is an effect example immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed in a state where all the character information G1 corresponding to step 1 is drawn, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates that it is step 1. Character information M1 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 1-1, the first step effect ends without drawing all the character information G1.
  FIG. 61 (d2) is an effect example immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed in a state where all the character information G2 corresponding to step 2 is drawn, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates step 2. Character information M2 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 1-2, the second step effect ends without drawing all the character information G2.
  FIG. 61 (d3) is an effect example in the middle of the third step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed in a state where all the character information G3 corresponding to step 3 is drawn, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates step 3. Character information M3 is displayed.
  FIG. 61 (d4) is an example of the effect immediately before the end of the third step effect (the end part). Here, the character information G4 indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the player is congratulated on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Character information M4 (“I did it”) is displayed. Although illustration is omitted in order to avoid difficulty in understanding the appearance, the first image is displayed from the timing of T8 when the end part of the third step effect overlaps with the early part of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect). The device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed such that the introduction image G5 of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) gradually appears on the front side of the character information G4.
  FIG. 61 (d5) is an example of an effect immediately after the start of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect). Here, the introductory image G5 of the specific effect is completely displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and character information M5 ("" indicating that the specific effect is being displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. "Acquiring Challenge") is displayed.
  FIG. 61 (d6) shows an example of an effect in the middle of a specific effect (acquired challenge effect). Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 displays an image in which an enemy and a friend character start a battle, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates character information indicating that a specific effect is being performed. M5 (“Acquiring Challenge”) is displayed.
  FIG. 61 (d7) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the specific effect (acquired challenge effect). Here, as a result of the battle between the two characters performed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, an image of the victory of the ally character is displayed and displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Character information M5 ("acquiring challenge") indicating that the specific effect is being performed is displayed.
  FIG. 61 (d8) shows an example of the effect after the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is completed. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 displays an image indicating that a sudden probability change (big hit) has been acquired, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information (“ "You did it!") Is displayed. Further, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the combination of the effect symbols 70a that become the big hit result mode is stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) in accordance with the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbols. Here, the combination of the production symbols 70a that will be the jackpot result mode is stopped (present stop), but if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the combination of the production symbols 70a that will be the loss result mode is stopped. It will be displayed (this stop).
  Note that, as a feature of the step-up notice effect 1 shown in FIG. 61, the first step is determined because the transition to the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is determined when the third step effect (final step) is started. Step effect time <third step effect time <second step effect time. By doing so, it becomes possible to increase the expectation whether or not the player will develop to the third step effect at the time of the second step effect (in the middle of the step-up notice effect) when the player has little expectation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
  In the step-up notice effect 1 of the present embodiment, the first step effect time is set to the third step effect time. On the contrary, the first step effect time is set to the third step effect time. Also good. If it does in this way, it will become easy to raise a player's expectation at the time of the 1st step production.
Next, FIG. 62 will be described.
FIG. 62A is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-1.
When the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of the SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing of T1 (30th frame), and the first step effect is ended at the timing of T2, the T3 The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T4.
FIG. 62B is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-2.
Variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing T1. And the 2nd step production of SU notice production 2 is started at the timing of T2. Thereafter, when the second step effect is finished at the timing of T4, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T7.
FIG. 62C is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-3.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, the first step effect is started at the timing T1, the second step effect is started at the timing T2, and the third step of the SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing T4. Start production. Thereafter, when the third step effect is finished at the timing of T5, when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, the effect symbol 70a is permanently stopped by the timing of T7.
FIG. 62D is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-4.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, the first step effect is started at the timing T1, the second step effect is started at the timing T2, and the third step effect is started at the timing T4. Then, the fourth step effect A (final step effect: incomplete) of the SU notice effect 3 is started at the timing of T5. Thereafter, the fourth step effect A is ended halfway at the timing T7, and when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing T9, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing T10.
FIG. 62E is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-5.
The change display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, the first step effect is started at the timing T1, the second step effect is started at the timing T2, and the third step effect is started at the timing T4. The fourth step effect B (final step effect: completion) is started at the timing of T5. After that, when the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is started at the timing of T8 and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T11, the specific effect is ended at the timing of T12, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T13. To do.
FIG. 62 (f) is a diagram showing an example effect produced by the SU notice pattern 2-5.
FIG. 62 (f1) is an effect example immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed with all the character images G1 corresponding to step 1 appearing, and the second image display device (sub-liquid crystal) 71 is a character indicating step 1 Information M1 is displayed. Note that, in the case of the SU notice pattern 2-1, the first step effect ends without all the character images G1 appearing.
  FIG. 62 (f2) is an effect example immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the character image G2 corresponding to step 2 appears on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in a state where all characters appear, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates that it is step 2 Information M2 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 2-2, the character image G2 does not appear all and the second step effect ends.
  FIG. 62 (f3) is an effect example immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the character image G3 corresponding to step 3 appears on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in a state where all characters appear, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates that it is step 3 Information M3 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 2-3, the character image G3 does not all appear and the third step effect ends.
  FIG. 62 (f4) is an effect example immediately before the end of the fourth step effect. Here, the character image G4 corresponding to step 4 appears on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 in a state where all characters appear, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates that it is step 4 Information M4 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 2-4, the character image G4 does not all appear and the third step effect ends.
  62 (f5) to (f8) have the same production flow as FIGS. 61 (d5) to (d8), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here. However, in FIG. 62 (f8), FIG. In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the combination of the effect symbols 70a that become the jackpot result mode (or the loss result mode) is stopped and displayed (main stop) in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Will be. In addition, the content of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when passing through the step-up notice effect 1 and the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when passing through the step-up notice effect 2 may be different. The type of specific effect to be executed each time is executed may be determined by lottery.
  Note that the step-up notice effect 2 shown in FIG. 62 is characterized by the fact that the transition to the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the fourth step effect (final step) is completed. The point is that time <second step effect time <third step effect time <fourth step effect time. By doing so, the player's expectation and frustration can be effectively given by the performance difference from the step-up notice effect 1 (whether or not the transition to the specific effect is confirmed by the execution of the final step effect). Can expect synergistic effects.
  In the step-up notice effect 2, the third step effect time is less than the effect time of the fourth step effect A. However, since the character image G4 is not completely displayed for the fourth step effect A, the third step effect A is not completed. It is good also as step production time> production time of the 4th step production A. In addition, the time for all step effects may be the same, or the effect time for all step effects may be longer than when the effect is not completed.
Next, FIG. 63 will be described.
FIG. 63A is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-1.
When the display of variation of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of the SU notice effect 3 is started at the timing of T1 (40th frame), and the first step effect is ended at the timing of T2. The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T4.
FIG. 63B is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-2.
Variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing T1. Then, the second step effect of the SU notice effect 3 is started at the timing T2. Thereafter, when the second step effect ends at the timing of T5, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T7.
FIG. 63C is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-3.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing T0, the first step effect is started at the timing T1, the second step effect is started at the timing T2, and the third step of the SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing T5. Production A (final step production: incomplete) is started. Thereafter, when the third step effect A is finished at the timing T6 and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the effect symbol 70a is actually stopped by the timing T7.
FIG. 63D is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-4.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step effect B (final step) is started at the timing of T5. Production: Complete). After that, when the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is started at the timing of T8 and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T9, the specific effect is ended at the timing of T10, and the effect symbol 70a is permanently stopped by the timing of T11. To do.
FIG. 63 (e) is a diagram showing an example effect produced by the SU notice pattern 3-4.
FIG. 63 (e1) is an effect example immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed with all the telop images G1 corresponding to step 1 appearing, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates that it is step 1 Information M1 is displayed. Note that in the case of the SU notice pattern 3-1, the first step effect ends without the appearance of all the telop images G1.
  FIG. 63 (e2) is an effect example immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed with all the telop images G2 corresponding to step 2 appearing, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates that it is step 2 Information M2 is displayed. Note that in the case of the SU notice pattern 3-2, the second step effect ends without the telop image G2 appearing all.
  FIG. 63 (e3) is an effect example immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed with all the telop images G3 corresponding to step 3 appearing, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 indicates that it is step 3 Information M3 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 3-3, the telop image G3 does not appear all, and the third step effect ends.
  FIG. 63 (e4) is an effect example immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the character information G4 indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and the player is congratulated on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. Character information M4 (“I did it”) is displayed.
  63 (e5) to (e8) have the same production flow as FIGS. 61 (d5) to (d8) and FIGS. 62 (f5) to (f8), and thus detailed description is omitted here. In 63 (e8), similar to FIG. 61 (d8) and FIG. 62 (e8), in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the jackpot result mode (or the loss result) is synchronized with the timing of the special symbol fluctuation stop. The combination of the production symbols 70a to be (mode) is stopped (displayed). In addition, the content of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when passing through the step-up notice effect 1 and the step-up notice effect 2 is different from the content of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when passing through the step-up notice effect 3 Alternatively, the type of the specific effect to be executed every time the specific effect is executed may be determined by lottery.
  Note that the step-up notice effect 3 shown in FIG. 63 is characterized by the first step effect because the transition to the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the third step effect (final step) is completed. The point is that time <second step production time <third step production time. By doing so, the player's expectation and frustration can be effectively given by the performance difference from the step-up notice effect 1 (whether or not the transition to the specific effect is confirmed by the execution of the final step effect). Can expect synergistic effects.
  In the step-up notice effect 3 of the present embodiment, the second step effect time is less than the effect time of the third step effect A, but the character image G4 does not appear for the third step effect A and is incomplete. Therefore, it is good also as the production time of 2nd step production time> 3rd step production A. In addition, the time for all step effects may be the same, or the effect time for all step effects may be longer than when the effect is not completed.
  Further, as a feature of the step-up notice effects 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, a specific effect (acquired challenge effect) starts from the start of variation of the effect symbol 70a regardless of which step-up notice effect is executed. The time until it is performed is the same (the 374th frame), and all the step effects (from the first step effect to the last step effect) are executed by then. Specifically, since the step-up notice effect 1 is determined to be shifted (executed) to the specific effect when the execution of the third step effect is started, at least a part of the third step effect by the 374th frame. Is executed. In step-up notice effect 2, since the transition (execution) to the specific effect is finalized when the fourth step effect B is executed to the end (completed), the fourth step effect B is the last (completed) by the 374th frame. ) Is executed. Since the step-up notice effect 3 is determined to be the transition (execution) to the specific effect when the third step effect B is executed to the last (completed), the third step effect B is the last (completed) by the 374th frame. ) Is executed. That is, the player is notified (implied) that the transition to the specific effect has been confirmed before the specific effect (acquired challenge effect) is started. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform different step-up notice effects with the same variation effect pattern, and it is possible to widen the selection range of step-up notice effects in one variation effect pattern.
(Big hit effect pattern determination process)
The jackpot effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step S1226-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the contents of the opening designation command determined to have been received in step S1225, and selects the jackpot effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 in step S1226-2. The jackpot effect pattern determination table is stored in the sub RAM 130c, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.
  In step S1226-3, the sub CPU 130a collates the opening designation command confirmed in step S1226-1 with the jackpot effect pattern determination table selected in step S1226-2, and determines the jackpot according to the jackpot effect pattern determination table. An effect pattern is determined, and in step S1226-4, the determined jackpot effect pattern is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.
  In step S1226-5, the sub CPU 130a specifies a jackpot presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot presentation pattern determined in step S1226-3, and sets the identified jackpot presentation pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. .
  Note that the jackpot effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process in step S1600. . Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 generate a jackpot effect corresponding to the jackpot effect pattern designation command (hit effect pattern) in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the audio output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel driving device 75, and the like are executed.
  In step S1226-6, the sub CPU 130a sets right-handed display data for right-handed display (LED lighting) on the right-handed second display 87 in a predetermined processing area, and this jackpot effect pattern determination process Exit. As a result, when right-handed display data is set in a predetermined processing area, display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. In 87, a right-handed display is performed.
(Big hit production pattern determination table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a jackpot effect pattern determination table that is referred to when the jackpot effect pattern is determined in step S1226-3.
  As shown in FIG. 65, in the jackpot effect pattern determination table, the opening designation command and the special game effect pattern are associated with each other and the contents of the effect are described for reference.
  In the jackpot effect pattern 1, the promotion effect was executed during the period from the opening of the grand prize opening 50 in the fifth round game to the closing of the big prize opening 50 in the eighth round game, and as a result, the promotion failed. This is a jackpot effect pattern for executing a promotion failure effect to notify (notify) that.
  The jackpot performance pattern 2 is a promotion success in which the promotion performance is executed between the opening of the grand prize opening 50 and the closing of the fourth round in the fifth round game, and as a result, the promotion is successful (notification). It is a jackpot production pattern that performs the production.
  The jackpot performance pattern 6 was executed during the fifth round game after the grand prize opening 50 was opened until the big prize opening 50 was closed in the 15th round game, and as a result, the promotion failed. This is a jackpot effect pattern for executing a promotion failure effect to notify (notify) that.
  The jackpot production pattern 7 is a promotion promotion in which the promotion effect is executed between the opening of the grand prize opening 50 and the closure of the eleventh round in the fifth round game, and as a result, the promotion is successful (notification). It is a jackpot production pattern that performs the production.
  The jackpot effect patterns 3, 4, 5, 8, and 9 are jackpot effect patterns in which the promotion effect that directs whether or not the type of the jackpot game is promoted is not executed.
  The jackpot effect pattern 5 is a jackpot effect pattern that executes a sudden probability change effect that notifies (notifies) that the state has shifted to the high probability gaming state.
(Data creation process)
The data creation process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing data creation processing in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step S1500-1, the sub CPU 130a performs the first special symbol second display on the basis of the special symbol variation display data and the special symbol stop display data set in the variation effect pattern determination process or the effect symbol variation stop process. The display control data for special symbol second display corresponding to the special symbol display signal for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing the LED of 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is created.
  In step S1500-2, the sub CPU 130a determines the LED of the normal symbol second display 82 based on the normal symbol fluctuation display data and the normal symbol stop display data set in the normal symbol roulette effect determination process or the normal symbol fluctuation stop process. The display control data for the normal symbol second display corresponding to the normal symbol display signal for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing is generated.
  In step S1500-3, the sub CPU 130a performs the first special symbol hold second display 83 and the second special symbol hold second display 84 based on the special symbol hold display data set in the special figure hold storage update process. Display control data for the special symbol hold second display corresponding to the special symbol hold display signal for turning on, blinking, or turning off the LED is generated.
  In step S1500-4, the sub CPU 130a makes a normal symbol for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing the LED of the normal symbol hold second display 85 based on the normal symbol hold display data set in the general symbol hold storage update process. The display control data for the normal symbol hold second display corresponding to the hold display signal is created.
  In step S1500-5, the sub CPU 130a turns on or off the LED of the right-handed second display 87 based on the right-handed display data or the right-handed erasure data set in the gaming state setting process or the big hit effect pattern determination process. Display control data for the right-handed second display corresponding to the right-handed display signal to be generated.
(Data output processing)
The data output process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing data output processing in the effect control unit 130m.
  First, in step S1600-1, the sub CPU 130a performs the first special symbol second display 80, the second special symbol second display 81, the normal symbol second display 82, and the first special symbol hold second display 83. In order to turn on the LEDs of the second special symbol hold second display 84, the normal symbol hold second display 85, and the right-handed second display 87, the above-described steps S1500-1 to S1500-5 are used. Output processing for the display that outputs various display control data is performed.
  In step S1600-2, the sub CPU 130a performs a command output process for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. Do.
(Specific examples of display results for each display)
68, the first special symbol first indicator 60, the second special symbol first indicator 61, the first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81, the second A specific example of the display result that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display on the one-image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 will be described.
  First, the details of the variable display of various symbols performed before the display result is derived by each display will be described.
  In the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61, the right end of the six LEDs arranged in the left-right direction, which becomes the special symbol display area when the power is turned on (RAM clear), is lit (disaster special symbol). The initial special symbol of the same mode as that of the first special symbol is displayed), and the special symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition. Specifically, the lighting position is repeatedly moved one by one in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.25 seconds) from the leftmost LED toward the rightmost LED, and finally one or more LEDs are turned on. Lost special symbol or jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.
  Then, the loss special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 is next displayed on the first special symbol first indicator 60 until the variable display is started (the second special symbol first). While the variable display on the display unit 61 is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed, the state of being stopped and displayed is maintained, and the second special symbol or the special jackpot special symbol represented by the first display unit 61 is stopped. Next, until the variable display is started on the second special symbol first display 61 (while the variable display on the first special symbol first display 60 is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed), the display remains stopped. The state of is to be maintained.
  In the first special symbol second indicator 80 and the second special symbol second indicator 81, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), one LED that becomes the fourth symbol display area is turned off (in the same manner as the lost fourth symbol). The display of the 4th symbol is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, turning off and turning on one LED is repeated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds), and finally the LED is turned off or turned on, and the lost 4th symbol or the big hit 4th symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, about the lighting cycle of LED, you may make it earlier than the lighting cycle (0.25 second) of LED of a special symbol 1st indicator.
  Then, the lost fourth symbol or the big hit fourth symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol second indicator 80 until the next variable display is started on the first special symbol second indicator 80 (second special symbol). While the variable display on the second display 81 is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed), the state where the stop display is maintained is maintained, and the lost 4th symbol or jackpot displayed on the second special symbol second display 81 is stopped. The 4th symbol is suspended until the next variable display on the second special symbol second display 81 is started (during the execution of the variable display on the first special symbol second display 80 or the execution of the jackpot game). The state as it is displayed is maintained.
  In the image display device, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), the initial effect different from the three effect symbols 70a (the loss effect symbol and the jackpot effect symbol) predetermined in the effect symbol display area (left area, center area, and right area). The display of the effect symbol 70a is performed so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the display of the special symbol. Specifically, the three effect symbols 70a are scrolled up and down, and finally the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed.
  The lost effect symbol or jackpot effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area is either until the next variable display starts, until the customer waiting effect is executed, or until the jackpot game is executed. Is maintained in a stopped display state, and when a customer waiting effect is executed or when a jackpot game is executed, it is not displayed in the effect symbol display area. Note that the initial effect symbol may be the same as the lost effect symbol.
  In the image display device, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), one special symbol (initial special symbol having the same form as the loss special symbol) is displayed in the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2. The special symbol variation display is performed so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the special symbol variation display. Specifically, the display mode of one special symbol is changed, and finally the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.
  The lost special symbol or jackpot special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display area is either until the next variable display starts, until the customer waiting effect is performed, or until the jackpot game is performed. Is maintained in a stopped display state, and is not displayed in the special symbol display area when a customer waiting effect is executed or when a jackpot game is executed.
  As described above, the size of the 4th symbol display area disposed inside the game area 5a is smaller than that of the special symbol display area (the special symbol 2nd indicator than the special symbol 1st indicator). Therefore, the area inside the game area 5a is not extremely narrowed. Also, the size of the special symbol display area is larger than that of the fourth symbol display area (the special symbol first display has more LEDs than the special symbol second display). On the other hand, it becomes easy to accurately notify the result of the game.
  Next, a specific example of the display result that is stopped and displayed on each display device as a result of the variable display will be described.
In the special symbol first displays 60 and 61, one of a display result indicating one type of special symbol for losing and a display result indicating special symbols for 22 types of jackpots is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result indicating the lost special symbol, one LED at the right end is turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off as in the case of power-on (RAM clear). In other words, the display result indicating the loss special symbol of the first special symbol first display 60 and the display result indicating the loss special symbol of the second special symbol first display 61 are the same display result.
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol, 2 to 5 LEDs are turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off.
  As a result of the special symbol determination, it is different from the jackpot game (the jackpot 50 is opened for a predetermined time or intermittently, but the degree of advantage to the player is lower than the jackpot game, and the game state is changed. In the case where the small hit game is made executable, the display result indicating the special bonus symbol on the special symbol first display 60, 61 is the display result indicating the special symbol for the loss or the display result indicating the special bonus symbol. It is recommended that the display result is different from the above. In addition, when there is one kind of small hit game, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also one kind, but when there are a plurality of types of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also small. It is better to have multiple types corresponding to the type of game.
The special symbol second indicators 80 and 81 derive and display one of a display result indicating one type of lost fourth symbol and a display result indicating one type of big hit fourth symbol.
Specifically, in the display result showing the 4th pattern of loss, one LED is turned off in the same manner as when the power is turned on (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the big hit 4th symbol, one LED is lit.
  In addition, when the above-described small hit game is made executable, the display result indicating the small winning fourth symbol on the special symbol second display 80, 81 is the display result indicating the lost fourth symbol or the big winning fourth The display result may be different from the display result indicating the symbol. In addition, when there is one kind of small hit game, the display result indicating the small hit 4th symbol is also one type, but when there are multiple types of small hit games, the display result indicating the 4th small hit game is also displayed. It is better to have multiple types corresponding to the type of small game.
In the effect symbol display area of the image display devices 70 and 71, one of a display result indicating 23 or more types of loss effect symbols and a display result indicating ten types of jackpot effect symbols is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result indicating the loss effect design, the combination (separation) of the 3 production designs that are not the same and have no regularity is stopped.
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the jackpot effect symbol, the combination of the three effect symbols is the same combination (9 types of 111 to 999) or the combination of the three effect symbols with regularity (753) is stopped.
  When the above-described small hit game is executable, the display result indicating the small hit effect symbol on the image display devices 70 and 71 is the display result indicating the lost effect symbol or the display result indicating the big hit effect symbol. May be different display results, but may be the same display result as a display result showing a predetermined jackpot effect symbol. Further, when there is one kind of small hit game, the display result indicating the small hit effect symbol is also one type. However, when there are plural types of small hit games, the display result indicating the small hit effect symbol is also small. It is better to have multiple types corresponding to the type of game.
In the special symbol display area of the image display devices 70 and 71, one of a display result indicating one type of special loss symbol and a display result indicating one type of special jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result indicating the loss special symbol, the “x” symbol is stopped in the same manner as when the power is turned on (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol, the “◯” symbol is stopped.
In addition, when the above-described small hit game is executable, the display result indicating the small special symbol in the special symbol display area of the image display devices 70 and 71 is the display result indicating the special lose symbol or the special bonus bonus symbol. The display result may be different from the display result indicating. In addition, when there is one type of small hit game, the display result indicating the small hit special symbol is also one type, but when there are a plurality of types of small hit games, the display result indicating the small hit special symbol is also small. It is better to have multiple types corresponding to the type of game.
  As explained above, there are multiple types of display results that show special jackpot symbols, but there is only one type of display result that shows special symbols, so if you only remember the display results that show special symbols, It is possible to easily determine whether or not it is lost. In addition, if there are fewer display results indicating the special symbol for loss than the types of display results indicating the special symbol for jackpot, two or more types of display results indicating the special symbol for loss may be used.
  In addition, only one LED is lit in the display result showing the special symbol for losing, whereas two or more LEDs are lit in the display result showing the special symbol for jackpot, so it is easy to determine whether it is a big hit or lost. It becomes possible to do.
  Also, since there are multiple types of display results (LED lighting modes) for each special jackpot symbol, it is difficult to instantly determine which type of jackpot game will be executed, which type of jackpot game will be executed It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the game.
  In addition, when a display result indicating a lost special symbol is derived and displayed, an LED that is different from the LED that lights when the variation starts is lit, so even if the variation time is extremely short, the variation display of the special symbol is performed. It becomes possible to recognize what has been broken.
  In addition, when the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed, at least one LED that is different from the LED that lights when the variation starts is lit, so even if the variation time is extremely short, It is possible to recognize that the variable display has been performed.
  In addition, since there are fewer types of display results showing jackpot 4 symbols and display results showing jackpot special symbols than types of display results showing jackpot special symbols, by checking the 4th design and special symbols, It is possible to instantly determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. Note that the number of display results indicating the jackpot special symbol may be less than the type of display result indicating the jackpot fourth symbol or the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol.
  Also, since there are fewer types of display results showing jackpot special symbols than types of display results showing special jackpot symbols, there are fewer types of display results showing jackpot special symbols. This makes it easier to predict the type of jackpot game. Note that the types of display results indicating the jackpot special symbol may be less than the types of display results indicating the jackpot effect symbol.
  In addition, since the size of the display result indicating the lost special symbol and the size of the display result indicating the lost fourth symbol are the same or similar (both are displayed by one LED), it is easy to grasp the correspondence between the two. It becomes easy to recognize that it is a loss.
  In addition, since the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol includes a display result indicating the jackpot special symbol, the display result indicating the special jackpot symbol is displayed because the LED that is turned on with the display result indicating the special bonus symbol is included. It is possible to reduce a bad impression on the display result.
  In addition, regardless of what kind of jackpot game is performed, the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol includes the one that the LED that lights up with the display result indicating the lose special symbol is lit. It is possible to further reduce the bad impression on the display result indicating.
  In addition, during the variable display on the special symbol first display 60, 61, there is no state where all the LEDs are turned off or a plurality of LEDs are turned on, and one LED is always turned on. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the variable display is being performed.
  In addition, during the variable display on the special symbol first display 60, 61, a plurality of special symbols (1 to 5 from the left side) that are not finally stopped except for the display result indicating the special symbol for loss. The mode in which the first one LED is lit up appears (displayed), so that it is easy to grasp that the variable display is being performed.
(Display examples of the first game information display device, the second game information display device, and the first image display device)
69 to 74 are diagrams showing display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a display example during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the non-short game state, and FIG. 70 is the reach effect (in the short time game state) FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a display example during a blackout effect and a moving effect by a movable effect member, and FIGS. 72 to 73 are a jackpot game. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a display example, and FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a display example when power interruption occurs.
First, FIG. 69 will be described.
FIGS. 69 (a), (b), and (c) are scenes of (e1), (e5), and (e6) in the production example by the music notice pattern 8 of FIG. In FIG. 55 (e), the hold icons (first hold icons H11 to H14, second hold icons H21 to H24), the fluctuation icon TH, the hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display). ), The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have been omitted, but will be described in detail here.
FIG. 69 (a) shows the present sign effect (pre-reach effect). Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 performs change display of the 1st special symbol which makes LED light in a predetermined order, and the 1st special symbol hold 1st indicator 63 Indicates that two LEDs are lit and two first holds are stored.
The second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol hold first The display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, ordinary map hold) is stored.
In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 80 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. The 2 indicator 83 lights up two LEDs and indicates that two first hold are stored.
The second special symbol second indicator 81 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 turn off the LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol hold second indicator. 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, ordinary map hold) is stored.
In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the hold icon H11 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the special display mode 3 is displayed on the second display unit. The (red) hold icon H12 is displayed, the change icon TH is displayed in the change icon display area 70D, and “2” indicating the first hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. . Further, the first special symbol display area DZ1 is displayed with the first special symbol variable display corresponding to the first special symbol variable display.
Further, since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol is not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.
  FIG. 69B shows a reach effect (SP reach effect) after the development effect is performed. Since the first special symbol continues to be changed and no new hold (first hold, second hold, general figure hold) has occurred, the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device In 79, the same display as in FIG. 69A is continuously displayed.
On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the hold icons in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D are displayed. And the effect symbol 70a is displayed small in the upper left so as not to disturb the reach effect (SP reach effect).
Note that the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 69 (a).
FIG. 69 (c) shows the effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is finished and the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 displays LED by the lighting mode (for example, only LED of the right end lights up) which shows a loss, and the stop display of the 1st special symbol is carried out. Is going.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, general figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63, the second special symbol first indicator 61, the second special symbol hold The first display 64, the normal symbol first indicator 62, and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 continuously display the same display as in FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b).
In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 80 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol, indicating that the variation of the first special symbol is lost. Yes.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, universal figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83, the second special symbol second indicator 81, the second special symbol hold The second display 84, the normal symbol second indicator 82, and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 continue to display the same display as in FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b).
On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 that are not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect), and the variation. The display of the icon display area 70D is displayed again, the hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the hold icon H12 is displayed on the second display section. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 70D has disappeared since the variation has ended. In the first hold number display area SH1, “2” indicating the first hold number is displayed. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol display area DZ1 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol is not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.
As described above, in the variable effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the non-time-saving game state, the special symbol variable display is performed by the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59. 61, special symbol second display devices 80, 81 of the second game information display device 79, effect symbol 70a and special symbol display region (first special symbol display region DZ1) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. , And the second special symbol display area DZ2), it is easy to grasp the fluctuation display of the special symbol.
In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed in the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold number of the second game information display device 79. 2 display units 83 and 84, a hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) and a hold number display area (first liquid crystal display) 70 Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), it is easy to grasp the hold number (first hold number, second hold number).
  On the other hand, during reach production (SP reach production), in order to draw attention to reach production (SP reach production), the hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The display of the hold icon in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) is erased, but the display of the hold number (the first hold number and the second hold number) is the special symbol hold of the first game information display device 59. The first display 63, 64, the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the hold number display area (first hold number display) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 Since the area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) are displayed, the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.
  Further, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during the normal gaming state, an effect symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 so as not to hinder the reach effect (SP reach effect). 70a is displayed in a reduced size, but the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second indicator 80, 81, and the special symbol display area DZ1, Since the size of the special symbol displayed on the DZ2 is maintained without being reduced, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display even if the production symbol 70a is lost. Is possible.
  In the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 and the second special symbol hold second indicator 84, the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, so the display indicating the number of holds is always normal. It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon for executing the hold change notice.
  In addition, in the first special symbol hold first display 63 and the second special symbol hold first display 64, the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, so the display indicating the number of holds is always normal. It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon for executing the hold change notice.
  Further, in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2, the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, so the display indicating the hold number is always displayed in the normal display mode. It will be. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon for executing the hold change notice.
  Further, in the icon display area constituted by the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon display area 70D, the first hold icon corresponding to the start of the change display. When the number or the second hold number decreases, the hold icon is displayed as the change icon by moving (shifting) the first hold icon or the second hold icon to the change icon display area 70D (the hold number is reduced). In the hold number display area composed of the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2, the first hold corresponding to the start of the variable display is performed. When the number or the second hold number decreases, the number is subtracted without performing the hold reduction effect as described above. Therefore, it is easy to grasp the pure number of reservations itself by checking the number-of-holds display area. Note that displaying as the icon may be included in the specific effect.
Even during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the number of reservations (the first number of reservations display area SH1, the second number of reservations display area SH2) of the reservation number display area (first liquid crystal display) 70 (main liquid crystal) 70 Although the display of 1 hold number and 2nd hold number was displayed without erasing, the hold number (first hold) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) Number and second hold number) may be deleted. Similarly, in the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (b), the blackout effect in FIG. 71 (a), the movement effect and the SPSP reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (b), which will be described later, the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1). In addition, the display of the hold number (the first hold number and the second hold number) in the second hold number display area SH2) may be deleted.
Thus, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect). , Second hold icon display area 70C1-70C4) hold icon display and hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) hold number (first hold number, second hold) The display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79 (the number of holds). Since the first hold number and the second hold number are displayed, the hold number (the first hold number and the second hold number) can be grasped.
Next, FIG. 70 will be described.
FIG. 70 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the short-time game state. is there.
FIG. 70A shows a variation effect before a reach effect (SP reach effect) in the short-time gaming state. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 performs change display of the 2nd special symbol which blinks LED in a predetermined order, and the 2nd special symbol hold 1st indicator 64 Indicates that two LEDs are stored, and two second holds are stored. Moreover, the normal symbol 1st display 62 performs the fluctuation | variation display of the normal symbol which blinks LED in a predetermined order. Since the right-handed first display 67 is in a short-time game, the LED is turned on to display the right-handed display.
The first special symbol first indicator 60 turns on a predetermined LED to indicate that the first special symbol is stopped, and the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65. Indicates that any LED is turned off and no hold (first hold, ordinary hold) is stored.
In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second indicator 81 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval corresponding to the variable special symbol display, and the second special symbol hold second The indicator 84 lights up two LEDs, indicating that two second reservations are stored. Further, the normal symbol second display 82 performs normal symbol variation display in which the LEDs are blinked in a predetermined order corresponding to the normal symbol variation display. Further, since the right-handed second display 87 is in a short-time game, the LED is turned on to display the right-handed display.
The first special symbol second indicator 80 turns off the LED to indicate that the first special symbol is stopped, and the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 All the LEDs are turned off, indicating that no hold (second hold, general hold) is stored.
In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second special symbol in the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol display area DZ2 is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, the hold icons H21 and H22 are displayed on the first display unit 70C1 and the second display unit 70C2 of the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, the change icon is displayed on the change icon display area 70D, In the 2-hold number display area SH2, “2” indicating the second hold number is displayed. Also, since the game is being played for a short time, the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
Since the first hold is not stored, no hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol is not changed, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Also, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating the second specific gaming state (“high probability gaming state” and “short time gaming state”). ing.
FIG. 70B shows a reach effect (SP reach effect). Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, since the change of the 2nd special symbol is performed continuously, the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 is performing the variable display similarly to Drawing 70 (a). . And since one second hold occurs and the second hold number is 3, the second special symbol hold first indicator 64 blinks the left LED and lights the right LED, It shows that three second holds are stored. In addition, two new figure reservations have occurred and the number of new figure reservations has reached two, so the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 lights two LEDs, and two common figure holds are stored. It shows that.
In addition, since the 1st hold | maintenance has not newly generate | occur | produced, the 1st special symbol hold | maintenance 1st indicator 63 remains light-extinguished.
In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second indicator 81 performs variable display corresponding to the second special symbol as in FIG. 70 (a). And since one second hold occurs and the second hold number becomes 3, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 blinks the left LED and lights the right LED, It shows that three second holds are stored. In addition, two new figure reservations have occurred and the number of new figure reservations has reached two, so the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 lights two LEDs, and two common figure holds are stored. It shows that.
Since the first hold has not newly occurred, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 remains off.
  On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, a reach effect (SP reach effect) using a character image is performed. In addition, the hold icons in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D are deleted, and the effect design 70a is displayed in a small size on the upper left. Thus, the reach production (SP reach production) is not disturbed. In addition, the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) in the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed as in FIG. 70 (a). In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G12 (“SP reach”) indicating that the reach effect (SP reach effect) is being displayed is displayed.
FIG. 70 (c) shows the effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) ends and the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 displays LED by the lighting mode (for example, only LED of the right end lights up) which shows a loss, and the stop display of the 2nd special symbol is carried out. Is going.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, general figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol first display 60, the first special symbol hold first display 63, the second special symbol hold. The first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 display the same display as in FIG. Also, the right-handed first display 67 remains lit.
In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second indicator 81 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, and indicates that the variation of the second special symbol is lost. Yes.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, universal figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol second indicator 80, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83, the second special symbol hold The second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 display the same display as in FIG. The right-handed second display 87 is also lit.
On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second special symbol in the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol display area DZ2 is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the stop display of the second special symbol. ing. In addition, the display of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the variation icon display area 70D that were not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect) is displayed again. 2 The hold icon H21 is displayed on the first display unit 70C1 of the hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, the hold icon H22 is displayed on the second display unit 70C2, and the hold icon H23 is displayed on the third display unit 70C3. ing. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 70D has disappeared since the variation has ended. In the second hold number display area SH2, “3” indicating the second hold number is displayed.
Since the first hold is not stored, no hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol is not changed, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information (“sorry”) indicating that it is lost.
As described above, in the variable effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the short-time gaming state, the special symbol variable display is the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59, 61, special symbol second displays 80 and 81 of the second game information display device 79, effect symbol 70a and special symbol display region (first special symbol display region DZ1, Since it is displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2), it is easy to grasp the variation display of the special symbol.
In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed in the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold number of the second game information display device 79. 2 display units 83 and 84, a hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) and a hold number display area (first liquid crystal display) 70 Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), it is easy to grasp the hold number (first hold number, second hold number).
The right-handed display includes a right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, a right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Since the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed, the right-handed display is easy to grasp.
  On the other hand, during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display areas (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 are held. Although the display of the icon is erased, the number of holds (the first hold number, the second hold number) is displayed with the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information. The special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the display device 79 and the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Since it is displayed, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.
  Further, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during the short-time gaming state, an effect symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 so as not to hinder the reach effect (SP reach effect). 70a is displayed in a reduced scale, but the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second indicator 80, 81, and the special symbol display areas DZ1, DZ2 Since the size of the special symbol to be displayed is maintained without being reduced, even if the production symbol 70a is lost, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display. It becomes.
  Further, the hold icons of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the change icon TH of the change icon display area 70D are displayed. As an effect for erasing the display, the SP reach effect has been described as an example as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, but is not limited to the SP reach effect.
  For example, the display on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 suddenly turns dark during a fluctuating effect as shown in FIG. Or a development effect such as a reach effect (so-called blackout effect), the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. And the display of the variable icon TH in the variable icon display area 70D are deleted, and the number of holds (the first hold number and the second hold number) is displayed in the special symbol hold number of the first game information display device 59. 1 display 63, 64, special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and hold number display area (first hold number display) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 Frequency SH1, to be displayed out with the second number of holding display region SH2).
  By doing in this way, it can make a player grasp | ascertain the number of holding | maintenances (the 1st holding | maintenance number and the 2nd holding | maintenance number), preventing preventing a blackout effect.
  Further, when a moving effect using the movable effect member 73 is performed during the changing effect, the first hold on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 when the movable effect member 73 moves as shown in FIG. The display of the hold icons in the icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the hold number (first hold number, second hold number). ) Is displayed on the first game information display device 59 special symbol hold first display 63, 64, the second game information display device 79 special symbol hold second display 83, 84, the first image display device ( The display is performed in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of the main liquid crystal) 70.
  By doing so, it is possible to make the player know the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the movement effect from being hindered.
  In addition, although not shown, the SPSP reach effect is similar to that in FIGS. 69 (b), 70 (c), 71 (a) and 71 (b) described above, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The display of the hold icon in the 1 hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, the 2nd hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is deleted, and the hold number (first hold number, second The display of the number of holds) is a special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, a special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display. The display is made in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of the device (main liquid crystal) 70.
  By doing so, it is possible to make the player know the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the SPSP reach effect from being hindered.
Next, FIGS. 72 to 73 will be described.
72 to 73 are display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the jackpot game.
FIG. 72 (a) shows the first round game effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 is LED in the stop mode (for example, only the 2nd LED from the left lights up) which shows probability variation big hit 2 (special symbol "B"). Is turned on, the first special symbol is stopped and the number of rounds indicator 66 turns on the LED in a mode indicating the number of rounds (8 rounds) per probability variation (for example, only the fourth LED from the left is lit). This shows that the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time is 8, and the first special symbol hold first display 63 blinks two LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored. . Further, since the right-handed first display 67 is in a big hit game, the LED is turned on to display the right-handed display.
The second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.
In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 80 lights and displays an LED to indicate that it is a big hit, and the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 displays the LED 2 Blinking, indicating that four first holds are stored. Further, the right-handed second display 87 turns on the LED and performs right-handed display.
The second special symbol second indicator 81 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.
In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the first round game effect of the jackpot game is performed, and the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 displayed before the jackpot game start, the second hold The hold icons in the icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon display in the change icon display area 70D are deleted. In the first hold number display area SH1, “4” indicating the first hold number is displayed. The first special symbol display area DZ1 has a stop display indicating a big hit of the first special symbol corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol. Further, since the big hit game is being played, an image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
Since the second hold is not stored, “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2 and the second special symbol is not changed, so the second special symbol display area DZ2 is stopped and displayed. ing. The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G13 (“round 1”) indicating the number of round games currently being performed.
FIG. 72 (b) shows a promotion effect performed from the first opening to the fourth closing of the big prize opening 50 of the fifth round game. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, since the common figure hold | maintenance generate | occur | produced newly, the normal symbol hold | maintenance 1st indicator 65 blinks four LED, and it is memorized that four common figure hold | maintains are memorize | stored. The normal symbol first display 62 performs the normal symbol variation display in which the LEDs blink in a predetermined order. The displays other than the normal symbol first display 62 and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 are continuously displayed as in FIG.
Further, in the second game information display device 79, the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 blinks four LEDs to indicate that four general symbol holds are stored, and the normal symbol second indicator 82 is predetermined. In this order, the normal symbols are displayed in a blinking manner. The display other than the normal symbol second display 82 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 continues to display the same display as in FIG. 72 (a).
On the other hand, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 displays an effect using a character image corresponding to the promotion effect. Here, the display of the image G10 “right-handed →→” displayed before the promotion effect is performed is deleted.
Note that the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed. In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the character information indicating the number of round games is erased (not displayed).
  FIG. 72 (c) shows a moving effect of the movable effect member 73 during the promotion effect. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59 and the 2nd game information display device 79, the same display as Drawing 72 (b) is displayed continuously.
  In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the effect image G15 is displayed in accordance with the movable effect member 73 moving to the front of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. In addition, as in FIG. 72 (b), the display of the image G10 “right-handed →→” remains erased, and the special symbols in the special symbol display areas (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2). In (first special symbol, second special symbol), the same display as in FIG. 72B is continuously displayed. On the other hand, the display position of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) is changed, and the display position is changed as shown in FIG. ), It is displayed below the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2).
  As described above, the number of holds in the hold number display area (the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) is produced by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. By changing the display position of the second hold number), the display (the first hold number, the second hold number) and the presentation performed in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 are mutually displayed ( Is prevented.
  FIG. 73 (a) is an effect performed from the fifth opening of the big winning opening 50 of the fifth round game after the promotion effect. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59 and the 2nd game information display device 79, the same display as Drawing 72 (c) is performed.
The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 displays an effect of notifying (notifying) that a big hit game will be continued after the fifth round game using the character image. In addition, the image G10 “right-handed →→” that was not displayed during the promotion effect is displayed again.
Note that the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed. The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G13 (round 5) indicating the number of round games that have been erased (not displayed).
  FIG. 73 (b) shows the ending effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59 and the 2nd game information display device 79, the same display as Drawing 73 (a) is performed.
  The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 displays an effect using a character image corresponding to the ending effect. In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2), special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) and the image G10 “right-handed →→” display are continuously displayed as in FIG. 73 (a). Yes. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G13 (“BONUS end”) indicating that the jackpot game has ended.
  FIG. 73 (c) is an effect showing that the jackpot game has ended and the game has shifted to a time-saving game. Here, the round number display 66 of the first game information display device 59 ends (turns off) the display of the number of rounds when the jackpot ends. The first game information display device 59 displays the same display as in FIG. 73B except for the round number display 66. Also, the second game information display device 79 displays the same display as in FIG. 73 (b).
On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the first on-hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second on-hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 that are not displayed during the big hit game, and the variable icon display area 70D. The display is displayed again, and the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, the third display portion 70B3, and the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. Yes. In the first hold number display area SH1, “4” indicating the first hold number is displayed.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. The special symbol display areas (the first special symbol display area DZ1 and the second special symbol display area DZ2) are stopped because the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed. Also, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating the second specific gaming state (“high probability gaming state” and “short time gaming state”). The
As described above, during the jackpot game, the hold icons in the hold icon display areas (the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4), and the fluctuations thereof, in order to draw attention to the jackpot game effect. Although the display of the variation icon TH in the icon display area 70D is erased, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol hold first display 63 of the first game information display device 59. 64, a special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and a hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Since it is displayed in the hold number display area SH2), the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.
The right-handed display includes a right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, a right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Since the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed, the right-handed display is easy to grasp.
  Further, even during the jackpot game, during the promotion effect, the display of the image G10 “right-handed →→” on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is erased, but the right-handed display is the first game information display. Since the right-handed first display 67 of the device 59 and the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79 are displayed, the right-handed display (right-handed) can be grasped.
  Further, the right-handed display includes the lighting of the LED of the right-handed first display 67 that is not marked with anything, the lighting of the LED of the right-handed second display 87 that is marked as “right-handed”, and the first The image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed on the image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. That is, the display mode of the right-handed display is displayed in a display mode that is more easily recognized by the player than the right-handed first display 67, and further from the right-handed second display 87. Also, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed in a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize. The right-handed second display 87 is provided closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 than the right-handed first display 67, and is also right-handed in that it is easy to see for the player. The right-handed second display 87 is easier for the player to recognize than the first display 67.
Next, FIG. 74 will be described.
FIG. 74 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 when power interruption occurs.
FIG. 74 (a) shows a variation effect before a reach effect in the normal gaming state. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 performs change display of the 1st special symbol which blinks LED in a predetermined order, and the 1st special symbol hold 1st indicator 63 Blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored.
The second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.
In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 80 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. The 2 indicator 83 blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored.
The second special symbol second indicator 81 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 turn off the LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.
In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the first special symbol in the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol display area DZ1 is variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the change icon display is performed. The change icon TH is displayed in the area 70D. In the first hold number display area SH1, “4” indicating the first hold number is displayed.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol is not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.
  Then, since the power interruption occurred and the supply of the power supply voltage was cut off, nothing was found in any of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. It is not displayed (FIG. 74 (b)).
  Thereafter, when the power failure is restored, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79 are restored at substantially the same timing. Specifically, the first game information display device 59 controlled by the main CPU 110a displays all displays (special symbol first display 60, 61, normal symbol first indicator 62, special symbol hold based on the backup data. First display 63, 64, normal symbol hold first display 65, round number display 66, right-handed first display 67, high-probability gaming state display 68, and short-time gaming state display 69) are restored. However, the second game information display device 79 controlled by the sub CPU 130a is specially based on the special symbol hold memory designation command (step S13) and the normal symbol memory designation command (step S14) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of recovery. The display of the symbol hold second display 83, 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 is restored. On the other hand, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 notifies that the power is being restored based on the fact that the image control unit 140 has received the power restoration designation command (step S7) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of restoration. Perform power restoration effect.
  After a predetermined time has elapsed, the image control unit 140 displays the number of holds on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 based on the special symbol hold storage designation command (step S13) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of recovery. The holding number display (first holding number display, second holding number display) in the areas (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2) is resumed (recovered) (FIG. 74 (d)).
  As described above, when power failure occurs and recovery is performed, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61 of the first game information display device 59. And the special symbol second indicators 80 and 81 of the second game information display device 79 are restored and displayed at substantially the same timing, and thereafter, the number-of-holds display area (first hold) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed. In the number display area SH1, the second hold number display area SH2) the hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display) is restored and displayed. That is, when the power supply is restored, the number of holds on the second game information display device 79 rather than the number of holds on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 (first hold number, second hold number). The display of (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed (recovered) first.
  Thus, the display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) on the second game information display device 79 before the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is restored, so that the first Even during the power restoration effect on the image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second game information display device 79 displays the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number). The player can grasp the first hold number and the second hold number).
Further, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbols held is normally displayed as the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold number of the second game information display device 79. 2 display units 83 and 84, a hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) and a hold number display area (first liquid crystal display) 70 Although displayed in four places, the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect) and jackpot effect If so, the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image table. Apparatus (main LCD) 70 number of holding the display area of the (first number of holding display region SH1, second number of holding display region SH2) is displayed in three places with. In addition, if it is after restoration after power interruption, the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79. Are displayed in two places.
In other words, the number of special symbols held may be displayed in two places, three places, or four places depending on the progress of the game.
  In the present embodiment, the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icon displayed there are displayed rather than the LEDs of the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 and the special symbol hold second indicators 83 and 84. Is large and is displayed at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine so that it can be easily seen by the player. However, the special symbol is more than the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icon displayed there. By making the LED of the holding first display 63, 64 and the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 larger, or arranging the LED at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine, it is easy for the player to visually recognize. Good.
  In FIGS. 68 to 74, the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numbers displayed there are larger than the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icons displayed there. Although it is easy to see, the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icons displayed there are larger than the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numbers displayed there. You may make it easy.
(Structure of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79)
FIG. 75 is a front view of the first game information display device 59. In the present embodiment, the first game information display device 59 is disposed adjacent to the outer rail 2410a at the lower left of the game area 5a, but is not limited thereto, and can be disposed at various positions. it can.
  The first game information display device 59 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination (in other words, information related to profits given to a player in a game). More specifically, the first game information display device 59 includes first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, a round number indicator 66, It can be configured as a right-handed first display 67, a high-probability gaming state display 68, a short-time gaming state display 69, a normal symbol first display 62, and a normal symbol hold first display 65.
  The second game information display device 79 also displays information related to the benefits given to the player in the game, and similarly, the first and second special symbol second indicators 80, 81, 1, second special symbol hold second display 83, 84, right-handed second display 87, normal symbol second display 82, and normal symbol hold second display 85.
(Details of the structure of the first game information display device 59)
As shown in FIG. 75, the first game information display device 59 has a plurality of LEDs 4045 arranged in two rows. These LEDs 4045 include first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, a high probability gaming state indicator 68, and a short-time gaming state indicator 69. A right-handed first display 67, a round number display 66, a normal symbol first display 62, and a normal symbol hold first indicator 65. The LEDs 4045 are arranged in two rows in parallel along the launch ball guide path of the game balls formed by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 (see FIG. 1). Note that the arrangement of the LEDs 4045 is not limited to this, and the LEDs 4045 may be arranged in one row along the launch ball guide path of the game balls, or may be arranged in three or more rows. , They may be arranged irrespective of the launch ball guide path.
  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the first game information display device 59 includes a first display substrate 4200 having a plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted thereon and a first cover covering at least the front side of the first display substrate 4200. A member 4202 and a protective member 4204 covering the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 are provided. That is, the first display substrate 4200 is accommodated by the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first game information display device 59 is installed in a standing posture such that the first display substrate 4200 disposed between the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 is along the board surface of the game board 5. The first game information display device 59 is configured to be difficult or inaccessible from the outside to the first display substrate 4200 by the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first game information display device 59 is fitted to an attachment opening (not shown) formed in a plate member constituting the game board 5 and attached to the plate member, and the front side faces the front side of the game board 5 so that the game The light of the LED 4045 is visible from the person. The first game information display device 59 faces the back side of the game board 5 (plate member) and faces a connector 4100 (FIG. 76) provided later so as to face the back side. It is accessible from the back side. The first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 may be combined to form a cover member.
  The first game information display device 59 fixes the first cover member 4202 or the protection member 4204 constituting the outer shell of the first game information display device 59 by screwing, bonding, or other methods to the game board 5. It is attached. Here, the first game information display device 59 is difficult to be removed, reassembled, or removed from the game board 5 by bonding or the like. You may attach with the structure in which a trace remains in either. In other words, the attachment structure of the first game information display device 59 and the game board 5 is a structure that is difficult to remove without destroying the game board 5 or the first game information display device 59, and the game board 5 or the first game board 5 by the removal. A configuration in which the game board 5 or the first game information display device 59 is destroyed or deformed by detaching the game board 5 or the first game information display device 59 by being removed or deformed, etc. 5 or the first game information display device 59 may have at least one structure in which a trace of removal remains.
  As shown in FIG. 80, the first display substrate 4200 is a printed circuit board in which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are provided on the front surface facing the player, and light can be emitted from each LED 4045 toward the front side. ing. The LED 4045 is mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200 instead of through-hole mounting for fixing the lead of the LED 4045 to the hole of the printed circuit board. In the first display substrate 4200, the light emitting element of the LED 4045 and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same front surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, in the first display substrate 4200, the lead for connecting the LED 4045 to the circuit does not protrude on the rear surface, and the solder for fixing the LED 4045 is not disposed on the rear surface. In the present embodiment, a plurality of LEDs 4045 are arranged in two upper and lower rows in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As the LED 4045, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. As the LED 4045, a chip type or a shell type can be used as long as it can be mounted on the surface, but a chip type is desirable from the advantage that the space can be reduced. The first display board 4200 is controlled by the control means of the main control board 110 (see FIG. 5) to control the ON / OFF / flashing state of the plurality of LEDs 4045. Information relating to the profits given to the player is displayed according to the combination or change in state.
  Thus, by mounting the LED 4045 on the first display substrate 4200, the space for disposing the LED 4045 on the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. it can. Further, by mounting the LED 4045 on the first display substrate 4200, the weight can be reduced and the failure can be reduced. Further, by mounting the LED 4045 on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, the mounting of the LED 4045 does not affect the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display substrate 4200, it is possible to arrange other electronic components on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is effectively used. The first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.
  The LED 4045 has either a configuration in which the light emitting element is disposed so as to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200 (see FIG. 77) or a configuration in which the light emitting element is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200. May be. The first display substrate 4200 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects white light or the like in the front surface area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect black light or the like in the front surface area. An absorption part may be provided. When the light emitting element of the LED 4045 protrudes from the surface of the first display substrate 4200, the light irradiated from the LED 4045 can be reflected by the reflecting part and efficiently used by providing a reflective part around the light emitting element. Further, in the case where the light emitting element of the LED 4045 is embedded in the first display substrate 4200, the light emitted from the LED 4045 by the absorption unit is diffused on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 by providing an absorption part around the light emitting element. Can be prevented.
  FIG. 80 is a front view of the first display substrate 4200 as viewed from the front surface side. The first special symbol first indicator 60 is composed of six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row, and the second special symbol first indicator 61 is composed of six LEDs 4045 in the upper row. The first special symbol hold first indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61, and the second special symbol. The reserved first indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first indicator 61. On the right side of the second special symbol holding first display 64, there is one LED 4045 constituting the high probability gaming state display 68, the short time gaming state display 69, and the right-handed first display 67 in this order. They are arranged side by side. The round number indicator 66 is composed of eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row, and the normal symbol first indicator 62 is composed of three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number indicator 66. 65 is composed of two LEDs 4045 from the right side of the lower row. The number and arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in each display are not limited to the above.
  As shown in FIG. 81, the first display substrate 4200 is provided with a connector 4100 on the rear surface opposite to the surface on which the LED 4045 is mounted, and via a harness (not shown) connected to the connector 4100. The first game information display device 59 and the main control board 110 are electrically connected. The connector 4100 is a so-called jack in which a plug provided at the end of the harness is detachable, and may be in a male terminal shape or a female terminal shape. The connector 4100 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the connector 4100 is fixed to the hole of the printed circuit board, but in this embodiment, is surface-mounted on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. In addition, connector 4100 has a connector opening into which a plug provided at an end of the harness is inserted toward the rear in FIG. Thus, the main body of the connector 4100 and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the first display substrate 4200 has no front surface protruding leads for connecting the connector 4100 to the circuit, and no solder for fixing the connector 4100 is disposed on the front surface. Thus, by mounting the connector 4100 on the first display substrate 4200, the arrangement space of the connector 4100 on the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. be able to.
  The connector 4100 is disposed on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the connector 4100 overlap with the first display substrate 4200 sandwiched between the front and back sides. In this way, by mounting the connector 4100 on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200, the mounting of the connector 4100 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Accordingly, the first display substrate 4200 can be provided with the connector 4100 on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front surface and the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 are effectively provided. By using this, the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.
  As shown in FIG. 81, a chip-type resistor 4500 as current limiting means is mounted on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. In this embodiment, the plurality of resistors 4500 do not overlap the connector 4100. They are arranged side by side. The resistor 4500 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the resistor 4500 is fixed to the hole of the printed circuit board, but in this embodiment, is mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200. In the first display substrate 4200, the resistor 4500 and the solder for fixing the resistor 4500 to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit does not protrude from the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the solder for fixing the resistor 4500 is not disposed on the front surface. In the present embodiment, the plurality of resistors 4500 are arranged side by side in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As shown in FIG. 83, the resistor 4500 is arranged between the connector 4100 and the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the circuit of the first display substrate 4200, and limits the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to be a predetermined value or less. This prevents an excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045.
  As described above, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200, even if the resistor 4500 breaks down, it can be dealt with by replacing the first game information display device 59, and maintenance can be performed. It becomes easy. Since the exchange of the first game information display device 59 can be easily performed, it is possible to shorten the game pause period and avoid impairing the interest of the game. Further, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200, the arrangement space of the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. it can.
  The resistor 4500 may be disposed on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 may have either a configuration in which the first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched in the front-rear direction or a configuration in which they partially overlap. As described above, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Accordingly, in the first display substrate 4200, the resistor 4500 can be disposed on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front surface and the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 are effectively provided. By using this, the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. Note that the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 may not overlap with the first display substrate 4200 sandwiched between the front and back surfaces.
  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the first cover member 4202 includes a front cover portion 4208 in which windows 4206 corresponding to the respective LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200 are formed, and a front cover portion. 4208 and a lateral cover portion 4210 formed so as to rise to the rear side at the periphery of 4208. The first cover member 4202 is formed in a box shape opened rearward by the front cover portion 4208 and the lateral cover portion 4210, and is provided for the first display in an inner region surrounded by the front cover portion 4208 and the lateral cover portion 4210. The substrate 4200 can be stored. When the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 is closer to the front cover portion 4208 than the open end (rear end) of the lateral cover portion 4210 ( Positioned on the front side, the entire first display substrate 4200 is accommodated in the inner region of the first cover member 4202. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 on which the LED 4045 is mounted with the front cover portion 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. The presence of the one cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. In the first cover member 4202 of this embodiment, the inner region is formed to match a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and when the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region, the lateral cover portion 4210. Since the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held without being displaced.
  As described above, since the first display substrate 4200 is disposed in a state of being accommodated in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the front side or the lateral side, and the first display substrate 4200 is used. Unauthorized acts on the substrate 4200 can be prevented. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the first display substrate 4200, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 as described above, and therefore the first display substrate 4200 is removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.
  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 82, the first cover member 4202 has a window 4206 penetrating the front cover portion 4208 in the front-rear direction corresponding to the LED 4045 by a window defining portion 4212 formed in the front cover portion 4208. It is defined. The window 4206 may be provided corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 4045 (this embodiment), or may be provided so as to correspond to two or more predetermined number of LEDs 4045 among the plurality of LEDs 4045. The window 4206 has a polygonal shape such as a quadrangle or a circular shape, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the corresponding LED 4045 so that the corresponding one or more LEDs 4045 are entirely inside. In the first cover member 4202, the windows 4206 are formed in two rows, and when the first cover member 4202 is disposed in a state where the front side of the first display substrate 4200 is covered, each window 4206 corresponds to each LED 4045. The LED 4045 facing each window 4206 can be visually recognized through the window 4206.
  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 82, the first cover member 4202 penetrates the front cover portion 4208 back and forth and partitions a window 4206 formed corresponding to the LED 4045, and the state of the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is changed. Each window 4206 has a window defining unit 4212 configured to be distinguishable. The window defining portion 4212 is formed in a cylindrical shape projecting rearward from the front cover portion 4208 (this embodiment), and a portion corresponding to the front side of the mounting region of the LED 4045 in the front cover portion 4208 is thickly formed. It is provided depending on the configuration. In the case where the window defining portion 4212 is formed of a cylindrical body, the window defining portions 4212 may be separated from each other and independent, or a part of the adjacent window defining portions 4212 may be integrated. . Between the front side opening of the window 4206 facing the front side and the rear side opening of the window 4206 facing the corresponding LED 4045, for example, the thickness of the lateral cover part 4210 or the thickness of the first display substrate 4200 is more than the plate thickness. A long distance is provided, and the window defining unit 4212 functions as a light guide unit that guides the light emitted from the LED 4045 to prevent the light from diffusing. In other words, a configuration in which a gap is formed between the front cover portion 4208 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, or a portion corresponding to the LED 4045 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 is configured to protrude forward, By the window defining unit 4212 that defines the window 4206, the light of the LED 4045 can be guided to the front without any leakage.
  As shown in FIG. 77, the first cover member 4202 is combined with the first display substrate 4200 so that the window defining portion 4212 faces the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the first display substrate 4200. The entire circumference of the LED 4045 mounted on the front surface is individually surrounded by the window defining unit 4212. In the present embodiment, the rear end of the window defining part 4212 formed in a cylindrical shape is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the adjacent LED 4045 is partitioned by the window defining part 4212. The first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are configured such that the window defining portion 4212 of the first cover member 4202 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 are in contact with each other and the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. Basically, there is a gap between the first display substrate 4200 and the surface. Thus, since the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is surrounded by the window defining unit 4212 that defines the window 4206, the light emitted from the LED 4045 does not diffuse and the state of the LED 4045 through the window 4206 is not diffused. Can be more easily identified. Further, since the rear end of the window defining portion 4212 is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the gap between the front cover portion 4208 and the first display substrate 4200 is blocked, light passes through the gap. Leakage into the window 4206 can be prevented, and the state of the LED 4045 can be clearly distinguished. In addition, even if an unauthorized tool is intruded through the window 4206, the unauthorized tool can be blocked only by the window forming unit 4212 in the window 4206, and the illegal act can be prevented more appropriately. Note that the window defining unit 4212 may face the rear end (rear surface) and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 so as to have a slight gap.
  As shown in FIG. 82, the first cover member 4202 includes a protruding alignment portion 4600 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. The alignment portion 4600 is formed integrally with the window defining portion 4212 so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 4212 facing the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. The alignment unit 4600 is configured to fit into a substrate hole 4400 (see FIG. 80) formed in the first display substrate 4200 and to align the first display substrate 4200 with respect to the first cover member 4202. ing. In the first cover member 4202, a plurality of alignment portions 4600 are arranged in a distributed manner on the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208 so as to be separated from each other. Among the plurality of alignment portions 4600, there may be one formed away from the window defining portion 4212. Each alignment portion 4600 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The alignment portion 4600 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 4212, but its rear end is positioned in front of the rear end of the horizontal cover portion 4210 and is accommodated inside the first cover member 4202. .
  The first display substrate 4200 includes a substrate hole 4400 formed so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction, and the substrate hole 4400 is also formed in a circle in accordance with the columnar alignment portion 4600. The substrate hole 4400 is set to have the same or slightly larger opening size as the outer shape of the alignment portion 4600. The alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are provided so as to correspond in number, position, and the like. The alignment portion 4600 is fitted into the substrate hole 4400, and the first display substrate is formed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202. 4200 relative positions are defined. Therefore, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled in a state in which they are positioned vertically and horizontally by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400.
  As described above, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled in a state of being aligned with each other by the fitting of the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400. The window 4206 can be aligned with no deviation, and the state of the LED 4045 can be identified more suitably. Further, since the alignment unit 4600 is formed integrally with the window defining unit 4212 and is reinforced by the window defining unit 4212, the alignment unit 4600 may be configured to protrude rearward from the window defining unit 4212. Can be avoided. By forming the alignment portion 4600 integrally with the window defining portion 4212, the projecting dimension can be shortened, and breakage or deformation of the alignment portion 4600 can be more preferably avoided.
  As shown in FIG. 81, the first display substrate 4200 includes a plurality of substrate holes 4400 formed so as to sandwich the connector 4100. The first cover member 4202 is provided with an alignment portion 4600 corresponding to each of the plurality of substrate holes 4400 so as to sandwich the connector 4100 mounted on the first display substrate 4200. More specifically, the first display substrate 4200 has a pair of substrate holes 4400 arranged in a symmetrical positional relationship with the connector 4100 sandwiched in the left and right (this embodiment), up and down, or diagonal directions. A pair of alignment portions 4600 are provided in the first cover member 4202 corresponding to each of the pair of substrate holes 4400. As described above, in the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure including the alignment portion 4600 and the board hole 4400 into which the first game information display device 59 is fitted is not unevenly distributed only in the region on one side of the connector 4100, but the connector 4100 is sandwiched between them. Dispersed in the regions on both sides.
  In the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure of the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 by the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 into which the alignment portion 4600 is fitted is provided in the regions on both sides of the connector 4100. They are distributed. The connector 4100 is a portion to which a force is applied when the plug of the harness is attached / detached. However, the first display substrate 4200 can be prevented from being displaced by the alignment structure arranged with the connector 4100 interposed therebetween.
  As shown in FIG. 79, the protection member 4204 has a plate shape, and a connector opening 4300 penetrating in the front and back direction is formed in accordance with the connector 4100 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. The connector opening 4300 is formed in accordance with the outer shape of the connector 4100 so that there is no large gap between the connector opening 4300 and the connector 4100 passed through the connector opening 4300. The protective member 4204 covers the first display substrate 4200 accommodated in the first cover member 4202 in a state where at least a part of the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is covered from the outside so as to make it difficult to access the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. The cover member 4202 (this embodiment) or the first display substrate 4200 is attached. The protective member 4204 is disposed so as to fit inside the first cover member 4202, and is disposed on the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 housed inside the first cover member 4202. The protection member 4204 of the present embodiment is formed in an outer shape that matches the inner region of the first cover member 4202 defined by the lateral cover portion 4210. When the protective member 4204 is stored in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the peripheral surface of the protective member 4204 is in contact with the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 4210, and the protective member 4204 is held so as not to be displaced vertically and horizontally. . When the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the position where the rear surface of the protective member 4204 is aligned with the open end (rear end) of the lateral cover portion 4210 or the front cover portion beyond the open end. Arranged on the 4208 side (front side), the entire protection member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202.
  As described above, since the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 is covered with the protective member 4204, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the rear, and illegal acts on the first display substrate 4200 are prevented. Can be prevented. Further, the presence of the protective member 4204 makes it difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202. Here, since the protection member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to remove the protection member 4204 itself by being obstructed by the first cover member 4202.
  As shown in FIG. 77, the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are assembled with a concave and convex fitting structure, and after the assembly, the first cover is difficult to remove, reassemble, or disassemble from each other. Any one of the member 4202 and the protection member 4204 is configured to leave a trace of removal. The fitting structure is such that a claw-like engagement portion 4214 provided on one of the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 (the protection member 4204 in this embodiment) is connected to the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are fitted into an engagement receiving portion 4216 provided on the other (the first cover member 4202 in this embodiment), and the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 are caught. It is integrated. The fitting structure is provided at a plurality of locations corresponding to the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204, and is distributed on the opposite sides of the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 across the first display substrate 4200. Is provided.
  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the first cover member 4202 is provided with an engagement receiving portion 4216 in the lateral cover portion 4210. The engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided on the open end side of the lateral cover portion 4210 so as to form a rear opening edge of the engagement opening formed so as to penetrate the lateral cover portion 4210. The lateral cover portion 4210 is formed in a concave shape with the front portion outward from the engagement opening to have a thin plate thickness, and an engagement receiving portion 4216 is installed over the opening side of the recess. That is, in the present embodiment, the engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided with a plate thickness that is thinner than the plate thickness of the lateral cover portion 4210 and is recessed so that the engagement portion 4214 is easily fitted.
  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the protection member 4204 is provided with an engaging portion 4214 that protrudes from the outer edge along the plate surface of the protection member 4204. The width of the engagement portion 4214 and the width of the engagement receiving portion 4216 (engagement opening) are set to be approximately the same, and the thickness in the front-rear direction of the engagement portion 4214 and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement opening are When the engagement portion 4214 is fitted to the engagement receiving portion 4216, the engagement portion 4214 hits the opening edge of the engagement opening and is positioned. The engaging portion 4214 has an inclined surface such as an arc shape or a flat surface that inclines backward as the front surface approaches the protruding end, and the rear surface is a flat surface along the rear surface of the protection member 4204. In other words, the engagement portion 4214 extends so that the front surface obliquely intersects with the engagement receiving portion 4216 and the rear surface intersects with the engagement receiving portion 4216 in an orthogonal or nearly orthogonal relationship. It is extended. Accordingly, when the engaging portion 4214 is fitted into the engaging receiving portion 4216, the first cover member 4202 is elastically deformed so as to be expanded by the inclination of the front surface of the engaging portion 4214 that contacts the engaging receiving portion 4216, and the engaging portion 4214 is engaged. The engagement portion 4214 can be easily fitted into the engagement opening over the receiving portion 4216. When the engaging portion 4214 fits into the engaging opening, the engaging portion 4214 is caught by the engaging receiving portion 4216 and the rearward movement of the engaging portion 4214 is prevented. Here, when the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216 are fitted, the rear surface of the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216 face each other and are hooked so that the engaging portion 4214 is engaged. The first cover member 4202 is not guided to be expanded by the engaging portion 4214 like when the engagement receiving portion 4216 is fitted. Therefore, the protection member 4204 cannot be substantially detached from the first cover member 4202 by fitting the engagement portion 4214 into the engagement receiving portion 4216.
  Thus, according to the fitting structure of the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216, it is difficult to remove the protective member 4204 from the first cover member 4202, and the first display substrate 4200 is attached by the protective member 4204. It is possible to protect and prevent an illegal act on the first display substrate 4200. In addition, when the engagement portion 4214 or the engagement receiving portion 4216 is destroyed and the protective member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, there is a trace of the destruction of the engagement receiving portion 4216 on the first cover member 4202. The remaining trace of the destruction of the engaging portion 4214 remains in the protection member 4204, and it is easy to find out that there has been an illegal act. Further, when the protective member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, at least one of the engaging portion 4214 or the engaging receiving portion 4216 is broken, and the protective member 4204 is attached to the first cover member 4202 again. Cannot be reassembled.
  The first game information display device 59 of the present embodiment is configured such that the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 are difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble, and remain removed. As a result, the first display substrate 4200 disposed between the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 is substantially difficult to remove from the first cover member 4202, and the first cover member 4202 is not easily removed. The reassembly is difficult and the removal mark remains on the first cover member 4202. With such a configuration, an illegal act on the first display substrate 4200 can be prevented, and even if there is an illegal act, it can be easily detected.
  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, an identification unit 4220 that can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 is disposed on the front side of the first cover member 4202. . The identification unit 4220 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around the transmission part 4222 as a first region that can transmit light or influences the transmitted light. Is also provided with a shielding portion 4224 as a second region that hardly transmits light. Moreover, the identification means 4220 may be provided with the combination area | region 4226 (FIG. 75) which is displayed on the shielding part 4224 and shows the light emission mode of two or more LED4045 as a combination. The identification unit 4220 of this embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The identification means 4220 is preferably formed in a shape that matches the front area of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 opens. In this embodiment, the identification means 4220 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. Has been. In this embodiment, the identification unit 4220 and the first cover member 4202 are bonded, but the size of the identification unit 4220 and the method of attaching to the first cover member 4202 are not limited thereto.
  The transmissive part 4222 of the present embodiment is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202 so that the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted and affects the transmitted light. It has become. The transmissive part 4222 is provided so as to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the transmissive part 4222 on the front side of the window 4206 prevents the LED 4045 disposed on the window 4206 opening and the window 4206 from being directly visible from the front side. It is. Here, “influence on light” means, for example, an aspect that makes the LED 4045 difficult to visually recognize by being translucent, an aspect that colors the light emitted from the LED 4045 by being colored, A mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused and the light emitted from the LED 4045 is converged and a mode in which the light is emitted from the LED 4045 is combined, or a mode in which these are combined. Light is diffused by the transmission part 4222. The transmission part 4222 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and is arranged according to the plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202. The plurality of transmission parts 4222 are identification means. 4220. That is, the identification means 4220 is formed with a transmission part 4222 having a square shape matching the window 4206 and the same size as the window 4206, and the transmission part 4222 closes the front opening of the window 4206.
  Thus, since the front side of the window 4206 is blocked by the transmission part 4222, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. Can do. That is, the transmissive portion 4222 can prevent an illegal act from being performed on the first display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 that penetrates to the inside of the first cover member 4202. In addition, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmissive portion 4222, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LED 4045 can be easily distinguished.
  Around the transmissive portion 4222, there is provided a shielding portion 4224 that is configured so that light is less likely to pass than the transmissive portion 4222 that covers the window 4206. In other words, the shielding portion 4224 is disposed so as to surround the window 4206 on the front side of the first cover member 4202. The shielding part 4224 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmission part 4222. In this embodiment, a part other than the transmission part 4222 is configured in one sheet constituting the identification unit 4220. The shielding part 4224 is disposed so as to overlap the area other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover part 4208 of the first cover member 4202, and does not cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding unit 4224 is composed of a dark color such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black, or a cold color such as amber, or the like, and has a low degree of brightness (absorbs light well). Is different.
  Thus, since the shielding part 4224 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmissive part 4222, the transmissive part 4222 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmissive part 4222 is further improved. It becomes easy to distinguish. Even if the window 4206 and the transmission portion 4222 are misaligned, it is difficult to understand that the window 4206 is not visible because it cannot be seen directly. Moreover, if the transmissive portion 4222 is placed on the window 4206, the transmissive portion 4222 surrounded by the shielding portion 4224 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.
  In addition, the shielding part 4224 is not limited to the configuration in which the transmission part 4222 is set to the same sheet, and the front surface of the front cover part 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding part 4224 so that the transparent part of the sheet is set. Alternatively, other configurations such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 4224 appears on the front side by disposing the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 4224 may be used.
  As shown in FIG. 75, the combination region 4226 is partitioned by a partition mark 4228 made up of a frame line (this embodiment) displayed on the shielding unit 4224. The division mark 4228 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of transmission parts 4222, and the combination area 4226 surrounded by the division mark 4228 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, the first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, the first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, the high probability gaming state indicator 68, the short-time gaming state indicator 69, the right-handed In the first indicator 67, the round number indicator 66, the normal symbol first indicator 62, and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (transmission portion 4222) among them constitute the indicator. For a thing, a group of transmission parts 4222 corresponding to the display is surrounded by a division mark 4228 to form a combination area 4226 corresponding to each display. In addition, the division label 4228 is not limited to the form of the frame line, and may have any configuration that can recognize that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination area 4226. .
  As shown in FIG. 75, specifically, the transmission area 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row is surrounded by the division mark 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60 is displayed. To do. The transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 in the upper row is surrounded by the division mark 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61 is displayed. A transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to two LEDs 4045 disposed between the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61 is surrounded by a division mark 4228, and the first special symbol reservation unit A combination area 4226 corresponding to one display 63 is displayed. The transmission area 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first display 61 is surrounded by the division mark 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol holding first indicator 64 is displayed. In addition, the transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row is surrounded by the division mark 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the round number display 66 is displayed. A transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display 66 is surrounded by a section mark 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62 is displayed. A transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 from the right side of the lower row is surrounded by a section mark 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol reservation first display 65 is displayed.
  Thus, by displaying the combination area 4226, the state of the LED 4045 in the area is recognized in association with each other, and the player can easily recognize information by the combination of the LED 4045.
As shown in FIG. 78, the identification means 4220 includes a first layer 4230 that easily transmits light,
The first cover member 4202 is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 4232 that is disposed on the front side of the region other than the window 4206 so as to overlap the first layer 4230 and is less likely to transmit light than the first layer 4230. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmissive portion 4222 is configured only by the first layer 4230 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 4224 that is difficult to transmit light is between the first layer 4230 and the second layer 4232. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 4232, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole and prevents light from being transmitted from the shielding portion 4224. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 4230 is disposed on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 4232 is disposed on the front side (front side). The identification unit 4220 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 4232 on a sheet formed of the first layer 4230 by painting, printing, or the like, and there is a level difference that can be visually recognized between the transmission part 4222 and the shielding part 4224. Absent.
  When the first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member of the game board 5, the rear connector 4100 is exposed to the rear side of the game board 5. The first game information display device 59 can be attached to and detached from the connector 4100 in a state where the first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member of the game board 5, and is easy to use.
  As the first cover member 4202, the front cover portion 4208, the side cover portion 4210, the window defining portion 4212, the engagement receiving portion 4216, the alignment portion 4600, and the like are integrally formed of a thermoplastic resin or the like. Molded products made of synthetic resin are used. Further, as the protection member 4204, a molded product made of a synthetic resin such as an integrally formed thermoplastic resin is used for each part such as the engaging part 4214.
  Note that the first display substrate 4200 is bonded to the first cover member 4202 by welding or bonding the first display substrate 4200 to the first cover member 4202 in a state where the surface is covered with the first cover member 4202. On the other hand, it may be attached in a state where it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or leave a trace of removal.
(Modification of the first game information display device 59)
Next, a modified example of the first game information display device 59 will be described. Here, differences from the first game information display device 59 described above will be mainly described, and description of similar configurations will be basically omitted.
  As shown in FIG. 84, the first game information display device 59 is disposed on the rear side of the covering member 4800 installed on the game board 5, and the front side is covered with the covering member 4800. The covering member 4800 is a member that functions to close or fill the front and rear regions on the front side of the game board 5, and includes a plate portion constituting the front surface and a wall portion extending backward from the outer peripheral edge of the plate portion. It is in the shape of a box opening to (Fig. 85). Here, the “front and back area” is an area that can be provided to provide a game area 5 a through which a game ball passes on the front side of the plate member of the game board 5. The covering member 4800 is arranged so that the front surface is substantially the same as the front end of the inner rail 35 or the outer rail 36. Sometimes doubles as When the first game information display device 59 is arranged inside the game area 5a, some of the game parts installed in the game area 5a such as the first and second start openings 45 and 47 and the big prize opening 50 are provided. May be constituted by a covering member 4800.
  The covering member 4800 has a front portion of the first game information display device 59 that is transparent or translucent, or has an opening corresponding to the window 4206 of the first game information display device 59. Through the window 4206, the state of the LED 4045 is configured to be visible. The covering member 4800 is attached to the plate member of the game board 5 so as to be replaceable by screwing or the like. The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800 so as to be housed inside the covering member 4800. At this time, the first game information display device 59 has a back surface facing the back side of the game board 5 (plate member) and a connector 4100 (FIG. 88), which will be described later, provided so as to face the back side. 5 can be accessed from the back side. Thus, the covering member 4800 can be attached to and detached from the plate member with the first game information display device 59 attached, and the covering member 4800 can be changed according to the exchange of the first game information display device 59 or the change of the model. The 4800 can be easily replaced.
  Since the first game information display device 59 is covered with the covering member 4800, it is difficult to access from the outside. Even if a fraudulent act is performed, it is possible to save time until it reaches the first display substrate 4200, and it is possible to make fraud more difficult.
  The first game information display device 59 of this embodiment is detachably attached to the covering member 4800 by screwing or the like. Therefore, by removing the covering member 4800 from the plate member, it can be easily replaced when the first game information display device 59 breaks down. The first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove or reassemble from the covering member 4800 by adhesion or the like, or when the first game information display device 59 is removed from the covering member 4800, You may attach with the structure in which a trace remains. In other words, the attachment structure of the first game information display device 59 and the covering member 4800 has a structure that is difficult to remove without destroying the covering member 4800 or the first game information display device 59, and the covering member 4800 or the first member by the removal. A structure that cannot be assembled as originally due to destruction or deformation of one game information display device 59, or a covering member that is destroyed or deformed by the covering member 4800 or the first game information display device 59 when removed. 4800 or the first game information display device 59 may have at least one configuration in which a trace of removal remains.
  The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800, and the light of the LED 4045 is visible from the player via the covering member 4800. Further, the first game information display device 59 has a rear surface facing the back side of the game board 5 (plate member) and a connector 4100 (FIG. 88) provided so as to face the back side, from the back side of the game board 5. It is accessible.
  As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in this modification, current limiting means 4500 and 4500 for controlling the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 are provided on the main control board 110 side. In addition, as long as the first game information display device 59 is configured to be electrically connected to the effect control board 130, the current limiting means 4500 and 4500 may be provided on the effect control board 130. As shown in FIG. 92, an excessive current flows through each LED 4045 by mounting a resistor 4500 as a current limiting unit on the main control board 110 and limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to a predetermined value or less. Is preventing. The resistor 4500 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the resistor 4500 is fixed to the hole of the printed board, but may be surface-mounted on the main control board 110. As a result, the main control board 110 can effectively use the surface opposite to the mounting surface without protruding the lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the resistor 4500.
The resistor 4500 is provided on the other surface opposite to the one surface on which the electrical components of the main control board 110 are mounted.
You may arrange | position in the position corresponding to the mounting area | region of an electrical component. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 and the mounting area of the electronic components may be either entirely overlapped or partially overlapped with the main control board 110 interposed therebetween. By mounting the resistor 4500 on one surface of the main control board 110, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 like through-hole mounting. Thus, the main control board 110 can be made more compact by effectively using both sides of the main control board 110.
  As shown in FIG. 93, the current limiting means 4500 may be provided as a driver 5600 in the main control board 110. The current limiting unit 4500 prevents the excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045 by limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to be a predetermined value or less. Thus, by providing the current limiting means 4500 and 4500 on the main control board 110 side, the resistance of the first display board 4200 can be eliminated or reduced, so that the first display board 4200 can be made more compact. The first game information display device 59 can be downsized.
  As shown in FIGS. 89, 90, and 91, when the first display substrate 4200 is accommodated in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 is opened at the open end of the horizontal cover portion 4210. The entire first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region of the first cover member 4202 at a position (this embodiment) aligned with the (rear end) or positioned on the front cover portion 4208 side (front side) with respect to the open end. The In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 on which the LED 4045 is mounted with the front cover portion 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. The presence of the one cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. In the first cover member 4202 of this embodiment, the inner region is formed to match a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and when the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region, the lateral cover portion 4210. Since the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held without being displaced.
  As described above, since the first display substrate 4200 is disposed in a state of being accommodated in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the front side or the lateral side, and the first display substrate 4200 is used. Unauthorized acts on the substrate 4200 can be prevented. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the first display substrate 4200, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 as described above, and therefore the first display substrate 4200 is removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.
  As shown in FIG. 89, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled by an engagement structure that melts the alignment portion 4600 and engages with the first display substrate 4200. Are configured such that when they are difficult to remove from each other, difficult to reassemble, or disassembled, traces of removal remain on either the first cover member 4202 or the first display substrate 4200. Specifically, when the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are fitted together, the tip of the alignment portion 4600 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is melted and becomes larger than the substrate hole 4400. By crushing in this manner, a latching portion 4600a is formed at the tip of the alignment portion 4600. The first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched between the rear end of the window defining part 4212 and the hooking part 4600a of the alignment part 4600 and fixed to the first cover member 4202.
  As described above, according to the engagement structure described above, it is difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202, and the first display substrate 4200 is protected by the first cover member 4202, and the first display substrate 4200 is protected. Unauthorized acts on one display substrate 4200 can be prevented. In addition, when the first display substrate 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202 by destroying the latching portion 4600a, the trace of the latching portion 4600a is left on the first cover member 4202, and illegal activities are performed. This makes it easier to discover that Further, when the first display substrate 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, the latching portion 4600a is broken, so that the first display substrate 4200 cannot be reattached to the first cover member 4202. It becomes difficult to reassemble.
  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, an identification means 4220 that can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 is disposed on the front side of the first cover member 4202. . The identification means 4220 may be an arrangement associated with the display by the LED 4045 or the LED 4045, such as providing only the first cover member 4202, only the covering member 4800, or being distributed in the first cover member 4202 and the covering member 4800. In addition, the identification unit 4220 may be any one of a configuration attached to the front surface or the rear surface of the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800, a configuration provided inside the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800, and the like. The identification unit 4220 of this embodiment includes a first identification unit 5122 provided on the front surface of the first cover member 4202 and a second identification unit 5124 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the first identification unit 5122. The second identification unit 5124 is disposed so as to overlap the front side. As shown in FIG. 84, the identification unit 4220 includes a third identification unit 4802 provided separately from the second identification unit 5124 on the front surface of the covering member 4800.
  As shown in FIG. 89, the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and a transmission unit 5126 serving as a first region that can transmit light or influence transmitted light, and the transmission unit 5126 A shielding portion 5128 is provided as a second region that is provided around and is less likely to transmit light than the transmission portion 5126. The first identification unit 5122 of this embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The first identification part 5122 is preferably formed in a shape that matches the front area of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 opens. In this embodiment, the first identification part 5122 covers the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. A portion 5122 is formed. In the present embodiment, the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member 4202 are bonded by the adhesive layer provided on the first identification unit 5122. However, the size of the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member The attachment method to 4202 is not limited to this. Note that the first identification unit 5122 may include a combination area that indicates combinations of light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045.
  The transmission part 5126 is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202 and can transmit light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206. The transmission part 5126 is provided so as to cover the entire front side opening of the window 4206, and the front side opening of the window 4206 is covered by the transmission part 5126 on the front side of the window 4206. The transmitting portion 5126 may be configured to be transparent, or may be configured to affect the transmitted light so that the LED 4045 disposed inside the window 4206 cannot be directly seen from the front side. Here, “influence on light” means, for example, a mode in which the LED 4045 is difficult to visually recognize by being translucent, a mode in which light emitted from the LED 4045 is colored, A mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused and the light emitted from the LED 4045 is converged and a mode in which the light is emitted from the LED 4045 is combined, or a mode in which these are combined. Light is diffused by the transmission portion 5126. The transmission part 5126 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and is arranged in accordance with a plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202, and the plurality of transmission parts 5126 are the first. It is provided in the identification unit 5122. That is, the first identification portion 5122 is formed with a transmissive portion 5126 having a quadrangular shape matching the window 4206 and the same size as the window 4206, and the front opening of the window 4206 is closed without a gap by the transmissive portion 5126. .
  As described above, since the front side of the window 4206 is covered with the transmission part 5126, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. it can. In other words, the transmissive portion 5126 can prevent an illegal act from being performed on the first display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 that penetrates to the inside of the first cover member 4202. Moreover, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmissive portion 5126, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LEDs 4045 can be easily distinguished.
  Around the transmissive portion 5126, a shielding portion 5128 is provided that is configured such that light is less likely to pass through the transmissive portion 5126 that covers the window 4206. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, the shielding portion 5128 is disposed so as to surround the window 4206. The shielding part 5128 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmission part 5126, and in this embodiment, a part other than the transmission part 5126 is configured in one sheet constituting the first identification part 5122. The shielding part 5128 is arranged so as to overlap with the area other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover part 4208 of the first cover member 4202, and does not cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding unit 5128 is composed of a dark color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black, or a cold color such as amber, or the like, and has a low degree of brightness (absorbs light well). Is different.
  Thus, since the shielding part 5128 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmissive part 5126, the transmissive part 5126 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmissive part 5126 is further improved. It becomes easy to distinguish. Even if the window 4206 and the transmission portion 5126 are misaligned, it is difficult to understand that the window 4206 is not visible because it is not directly visible. Moreover, if the transmission part 5126 is placed on the window 4206, the transmission part 5126 surrounded by the shielding part 5128 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.
  In addition, the shielding part 5128 is not limited to the configuration in which the transmission part 5126 is set to the same sheet, and the front surface of the front cover part 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding part 5128 so that the transparent part of the sheet is set. Alternatively, other configurations such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 5128 appears on the front side by disposing the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 5128 may be used.
  As shown in FIG. 90, the first identification unit 5122 is disposed so as to overlap the first layer 5130 on the front side of the first cover member 4202 other than the window 4206 and the first layer 5130 that easily transmits light. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 5131 that is less likely to transmit light than the first layer 5130. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmission portion 5126 is configured only by the first layer 5130 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128 that is difficult to transmit light is between the first layer 5130 and the second layer 5131. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 5131, it is difficult to transmit light in the stacking direction (thickness direction), and light is prevented from transmitting from the shielding portion 5128. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 5130 is disposed on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 5131 is disposed on the front side (front side). The first identification unit 5122 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 5131 by painting, printing, or the like on a sheet made of the first layer 5130, and can be visually recognized between the transmission unit 5126 and the shielding unit 5128. There is no step.
  By configuring the first identification portion 5122 in this manner, even if the window 4206 and the transmission portion 5126 are misaligned, light can be guided to the transmission portion 5126 by the first layer 5130, and the shielding portion 5128. Since the transmissive portion 5126 surrounded by the light shines, the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced. In addition, in the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128, the light incident on the first layer 5130 is blocked by the front second layer 5131 and does not leak to the front side, so that the transmission portion 5126 can be clearly identified.
  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the second identification portion 5124 is located on the front side of the window 4206 and is attached to the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around the light-transmitting unit 5132 and the light-transmitting unit 5132 as a first region that can transmit light or influence the transmitted light. The light-shielding part 5134 as a 2nd area | region which is hard to permeate | transmit light rather than the light transmission part 5132 is provided. In addition, the second identification unit 5124 may include a combination area 4804 that is displayed on the light shielding unit 5134 and indicates the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 as a combination. The second identification portion 5124 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is formed in accordance with the range of the plurality of windows 4206, and the front side of the plurality of windows 4206 is covered by one second identification unit 5124. In the present embodiment, the second identification portion 5124 and the covering member 4800 are bonded by the adhesive layer of the second identification portion 5124. However, the size of the second identification portion 5124, the attachment method to the covering member 4800, etc. It is not limited to this.
The light passing portion 5132 of this modification is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202,
The light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted or the transmitted light is affected. The light passing portion 5132 is provided so as to cover at least the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the state of the LED 4045 can be visually recognized through the window 4206 by the light passing portion 5132 on the front side of the window 4206. The light transmitting portion 5132 of this embodiment is configured to be transparent and formed in a range corresponding to the plurality of windows 4206. Note that the light transmitting unit 5132 may be configured to affect the transmitted light, similarly to the transmitting unit 5126 of the first identifying unit 5122. Then, by adjusting the light emitted from the LED 4045 by the light passing portion 5132, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LED 4045 can be easily distinguished.
  Around the light passing portion 5132, there is provided a light shielding portion 5134 configured such that light is less likely to pass than the light passing portion 5132 that covers the window 4206. In other words, the light shielding portion 5134 is disposed so as to surround the window 4206 on the front side of the first cover member 4202. The light-shielding part 5134 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the light-transmitting part 5132, and in this embodiment, a part other than the light-transmitting part 5132 is configured in one sheet constituting the second identification part 5124. The light shielding portion 5134 is disposed on the front side of the first cover member 4202 so as to overlap an area other than the window 4206, and does not cover the inside of the window 4206. The light shielding unit 5134 is configured by a dark color with a low degree of brightness (which absorbs light well), such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black, or a cold color such as amber. Is different.
  As described above, since the light blocking portion 5134 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the light passing portion 5132, the light passing portion 5132 can be easily understood, and the LED 4045 recognized through the light passing portion 5132 can be seen. The situation becomes easier to distinguish. Further, even if the window 4206 and the light transmitting portion 5132 are misaligned, it can be difficult to understand the misalignment.
  In addition, the light shielding part 5134 is not limited to the configuration in which the light transmitting part 5132 is set to the same sheet, but the front part of the covering member 4800 corresponding to the front side of the window 4206 is set as the light shielding part 5134 so that the transparent part of the sheet Other configurations such as a configuration in which the light shielding portion 5134 appears on the front side by not arranging the sheet via the front side of the light shielding portion 5134 may be used. The covering member 4800 may be provided with an opening corresponding to the window 4206, and the opening may be blocked by the second identification portion 5124 (the light transmitting portion 5132 and / or the light shielding portion 5134).
  The combination area 4804 is partitioned by a partition mark 4806 including a frame line (this embodiment) displayed on the light shielding unit 5134. The division mark 4806 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of light transmitting portions 5132, and the combination area 4804 surrounded by the division mark 4806 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, the first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, the first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, the high probability gaming state indicator 68, the short-time gaming state indicator 69, the right-handed In the first indicator 67, the round number indicator 66, the normal symbol first indicator 62, and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65, among them, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (the transmitting part 5126 or the light transmitting part 5132) are used. With respect to what constitutes the display device, a group of LEDs 4045 (transmission portion 5126 or light transmission portion 5132) corresponding to the display device is surrounded by a partition mark 4806 to form a combination region 4804 corresponding to each display device. Note that the section mark 4806 is not limited to the form of the frame line, and may have any configuration that can recognize that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination area 4804. .
  Specifically, the combination area 4804 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60 is displayed by being surrounded by the division mark 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61 is displayed by being surrounded by the division mark 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4845 in the upper row. A first special symbol hold first display surrounded by a partition mark 4806 so as to correspond to two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the container 63 is displayed. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol holding first display 64 is displayed by being surrounded by a partition mark 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first display 61. In addition, a combination area 4804 corresponding to the round number display 66 is displayed by being surrounded by a division mark 4806 so as to correspond to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol first indicator 62 is displayed by surrounding it with the division mark 4806 so as to correspond to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number indicator. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol holding first display 65 is displayed by being surrounded by a partition mark 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 from the lower right side.
  In this way, by displaying the combination area 4804, the state of the LED 4045 in the area is recognized in association with each other, and the player can easily recognize information by the combination of the LED 4045.
  As shown in FIG. 90, the second identification unit 5124 is disposed so as to overlap the front side of the first layer 5136 in addition to the first layer 5136 that easily transmits light and the region corresponding to the window 4206. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 5138 that transmits light less than 5136. In other words, the light passing portion 5132 corresponding to the window 4206 is configured by only the first layer 5136 that transmits light, and the portions corresponding to the light blocking portion 5134 that is difficult to transmit light are the first layer 5136 and the second layer 5138. It is comprised by the laminated part. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 5138, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole, and prevents light from being transmitted from the light shielding portion 5134. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 5136 is disposed on the rear side, and the second layer 5138 is disposed on the front side (front side). The second identification unit 5124 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 5138 on a sheet made of the first layer 5136 by painting, printing, or the like, and is visible between the light transmission unit 5132 and the light shielding unit 5134. There is no step.
  The third identification unit 4802 is an area in which various information is displayed, and is attached to the covering member 4800. The third identification portion 4802 is formed in a sheet shape, and is disposed on the front surface of the covering member 4800 at a position different from the second identification portion 5124 (upper side in the present embodiment). In the third identification unit 4802, the displayed information is visible to the player. In the present embodiment, the third identification portion 4802 and the covering member 4800 are bonded by the adhesive layer of the third identification portion 4802. However, the size of the third identification portion 4802, the attachment method to the covering member 4800, etc. It is not limited to this. Further, the information displayed by the third identification unit 4802 may be displayed on the second identification unit 5124 or the first identification unit 5122, or may be displayed separately from the identification unit 4220, and the third identification unit 4802 may be omitted. .
  As described above, by providing the third identification unit 4802, more information can be displayed, and information displayed on the first game information display device 59 can be more easily understood. Further, by dividing each information and sorting and displaying it on a plurality of identification units 4802, 5122, 5124, it is possible to flexibly cope with changes such as when changing models.
  The identification units 4802, 5122, and 5124 (identification means 4220) may be configured to cover the peripheral surface with a protection unit 4808 (FIG. 85). In the present embodiment, a protective portion 4808 is provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, the peripheral surface of the second identifying portion 5124 attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the third identifying portion attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. Each of the peripheral surfaces of 4802 is covered with a protective portion 4808. Specifically, the protection portion 4808 is configured by a wall extending in the front-rear direction in a recess formed in accordance with the shape of the identification portion 4802, 5124 corresponding to the attachment position of the identification portion 4802, 5124. Yes. Further, the concave portion of the covering member 4800 has a depth approximately equal to the thickness of the identification portions 4802 and 5124. The protective portion 4808 faces the circumferential surface of the identification portions 4802 and 5124 fitted and attached to the concave portions, and the identification portion. The entire periphery of 4802, 5124 is surrounded by a protection unit 4808.
  Thus, by covering the peripheral surfaces of the identification units 4802 and 5124 with the protection unit 4808, it is possible to make it difficult to access the identification units 4802 and 5124 with the protection unit 4808. The removal of 4802, 5124 can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as changing the identification units 4802 and 5124 or removing the identification units 4802 and 5124 to access the first display substrate 4200. Further, the identification units 4802 and 5124 can be aligned by attaching the identification units 4802 and 5124 to the covering member 4800 with the protection unit 4808 as a reference. In particular, since the second identification portion 5124 overlapping the front side of the window 4206 can be arranged without deviation, the state of the LED 4045 can be more appropriately determined.
  In this modification, the protection unit 4808 is provided corresponding to the entire circumference of the identification units 4802 and 5124. The structure provided correspondingly may be sufficient.
  The information displayed by the identification means 4220 is supplemented or explained by information related to profits given to the player in the game (sometimes referred to as game state information in the description) displayed by the first game information display device 59. Gaming status display, unique display indicating unique information such as model name, probability of gaming machine 1 (for example, 1/299), probability of gaming machine 1 (for example, 60/100, etc.) A specification display indicating specification information such as the number of rounds (for example, 15R, 4R, etc.) may be displayed alone or in combination. In addition, these displays are described by printing or other methods visible to the player.
  For example, as the game state display, as in the above-described embodiment, by forming the combination area 4804 surrounded by the partition mark 4806, the states of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the combination area 4804 are associated and recognized as combinations, The game state information displayed by the combination of a plurality of LEDs 4045 may be easily identified and assisted.
  FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the game state display 4810 applied in correspondence with the round number display 66. For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the game state display 4810 has a round number at a position where it can be seen that it corresponds to the round number display 66, such as a position corresponding to the side of the round number display 66. The pattern which represents the indicator 66 and the structure which describes the display mode and round number of LED4045 for every round may be sufficient. A gaming state display 4810 in FIG. 86 (a) explains the gaming state information (round number) displayed by the combination of the plurality of LEDs 4045 of the round number display 66. Therefore, by referring to the game status display 4810 in FIG. 86 (a), it is possible to easily identify the game status information (round number) indicated by the round number display 66.
  Further, as the game status display 4810, a sign such as a number or a symbol is arranged corresponding to the LED 4045 at a position corresponding to the side of the LED 4045 (FIG. 86 (b)) or the front side (FIG. 86 (c)). The sign may be configured to assist the recognition of the state of the LED 4045 as a combination, or the structure of the LED 4045 may be described. The sign may be a color or a shape difference.
  The identification unit 4220 is divided into a first identification unit 5122 provided in the first cover member 4202 and a second identification unit 5124 provided in the covering member 4800 as a configuration corresponding to the front side of the window 4206. Since the functions required for the identification unit 4220 can be assigned to the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the configuration of each identification unit 5122 and 5124 can be simplified. Further, by assigning and setting the functions required of the identification unit 4220 to the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the state of the LED 4045 can be more clearly distinguished, and the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily understood. In addition, by arranging the first identification unit 5122 and the second identification unit 5124 so as to overlap each other, a synergistic effect that is difficult with one sheet can be obtained due to the overlap of the two identification units 5122 and 5124.
  Since the covering member 4800 is attached to the game board 5 in a replaceable manner, when the covering member 4800 is removed from the game board 5 and replaced when changing the model, the identification portions 4802 and 5124 provided on the covering member 4800 are replaced. It can be easily exchanged. If the unique display and the specification display are performed by the covering member 4800, another model can be handled by replacing the covering member 4800. In addition, since the first identification unit 5122 is provided in the first cover member 4202, it is not affected by the replacement of the covering member 4800.
(Details of structure of second game information display device 79)
As shown in FIG. 94, the second game information display device 79 has a plurality of LEDs arranged in a triangular shape. These LEDs are the first and second special symbol second indicators 80 and 81, the first and second special symbol hold second indicators 83 and 84, the normal symbol second indicator 82, and the normal symbol hold second indicator. And a right-handed second display 87.
  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the second game information display device 79 covers at least the second display substrate 5800 having 10 LEDs on its surface and the front side of the second display substrate 5800. The second cover member 5710 and the like are included. Although not shown here, on the front side (top portion) of the second cover member 5710, an identification unit that can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs individually or as a combination of two or more LED light emission modes is disposed. .
  The second cover member 5710 includes a plate-like pedestal portion 5730 that forms the bottom of the second cover member 5710, and a triangular prism-shaped protrusion portion 5720 that protrudes from the pedestal portion 5730. The corners on the side surfaces of the protrusions 5720 are chamfered, and the second game information display device 79 is arranged with the top of the protrusions 5720 facing the player.
  The second display substrate 5800 is a printed circuit board in which a plurality of LEDs are provided on the front surface that faces the player, and light can be irradiated from each LED toward the front side. The LED is mounted on the surface of the second display substrate 5800, not through-hole mounting for fixing the LED lead to the hole of the printed circuit board. In the second display substrate 5800, the LED light emitting element and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the second display substrate 5800 are on the same front surface of the second display substrate 5800. That is, in the second display substrate 5800, the lead for connecting the LED to the circuit does not protrude on the rear surface, and the solder for fixing the LED is not disposed on the rear surface. As the LED, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. As the LED, any of a chip type or a shell type can be used as long as it can be mounted on the surface, but a chip type is desirable from the advantage of reducing the space. The second display board 5800 is controlled by the control means of the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 5) to turn on, turn off, and blink the plurality of LEDs. Information relating to the profits given to the player is displayed according to the combination or change in state.
  Thus, by mounting the LEDs on the second display substrate 5800, the space for arranging the LEDs on the second display substrate 5800 can be reduced, and the second display substrate 5800 can be made more compact. it can. Further, by mounting the LED on the second display substrate 5800, the weight can be reduced and the failure can be reduced. In addition, by mounting the LED on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800, the mounting of the LED does not affect the rear surface of the second display substrate 5800 like through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the second display substrate 5800, other electronic components can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the second display substrate 5800 is effectively used. The second display substrate 5800 can be made more compact.
  The LED may have either a configuration in which the light emitting element is arranged so as to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800 or a configuration in which the LED is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800. The second display substrate 5800 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects white light or the like in a front region where a plurality of LEDs are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect black light or the like in the front region. An absorption part may be provided. In the case where the LED light emitting element protrudes from the surface of the second display substrate 5800, by providing a reflecting portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED can be reflected by the reflecting portion and used efficiently. In addition, in the case where the LED light emitting element is embedded in the second display substrate 5800, by providing an absorbing portion around the light emitting element, light emitted from the LED by the absorbing portion is diffused on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800. Can be prevented.
  Ten light guide hole portions 5740 are formed in the protrusion portion 5720 as windows that penetrate the protrusion portion 5720 along the protrusion direction. The second display substrate 5800 is attached to the pedestal portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710 so as to cover the surface thereof, and each light guide hole 5740 is surface-mounted on the surface of the second display substrate 5800. The LED is arranged at a position corresponding to the LED. Accordingly, the lighting state of each LED can be visually recognized from the top side of the protruding portion 5720 through the light guide hole 5740.
  On the other hand, the back surface of the second display substrate 5800 is provided with a connector 5810 wired to an LED mounted on the front surface (see FIG. 95). And are connected.
  The second display substrate 5800 is screwed to the pedestal portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710, whereby the second display substrate 5800 can be detached from the second cover member 5710 and reassembled. The second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 is attached in a state where no trace remains when disassembled.
  Note that the method of attaching the second display substrate 5800 to the second cover member 5710 (the pedestal portion 5730) is not limited to this. For example, the second display substrate 5800 is attached by using an engaging portion and an engaging receiving portion. The second cover member 5710 may be attached in a state in which no trace remains on the second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 when the second cover member 5710 can be detached, reassembled, and disassembled.
  Further, the shape of the protruding portion 5720 is not limited to the triangular prism shape, but may be various shapes such as a cylindrical shape and a quadrangular prism shape. In the present embodiment, as an example, 10 LEDs are surface-mounted on the second display substrate 5800, and 10 light guide hole portions corresponding to each LED are provided on the second cover member 5710. Although 5740 is formed, it is possible to provide not only this but 1 or several LED and the light guide hole.
  In addition, the second game information display device 79 may be divided into a plurality of display devices according to the function, and in that case, the second game information display device 79 is grouped adjacent to the inner rail 35 at the lower left of the game area 5a. You may arrange | position and may distributely arrange in several places of the game area | region 5a.
  When the second game information display device 79 is divided into a plurality of display devices, for example, the first special symbol second display 80 and the first special symbol hold second display 83 are set as one display device, and the second The special symbol second display 81 and the second special symbol hold second display 84 are one display device, the normal symbol second display 82 and the normal symbol hold second display are one display device, Two displays may be used as one display device.
  The first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81, and the normal symbol second indicator 82 are used as one display device, and the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 and the second special symbol second indicator 82 are provided. The symbol hold second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 may be one display device, and the right-handed second display may be one display device.
  The first special symbol second indicator 80, the second special symbol second indicator 81, and the normal symbol second indicator 82 are set as one display device, and the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 is indicated as one display. The second special symbol hold second display 84 may be a single display device, and the normal symbol hold second display 85 and the right-handed second display may be a single display device.
(Modification of the second game information display device 79)
Next, a modified example of the second game information display device 79 will be described. Here, differences from the above-described second game information display device 79 will be mainly described, and description of similar configurations will be basically omitted.
  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the present modification, the second game information display device 79 is closer to the right area of the game area 5a (the right channel through which the right-handed game ball flows down), and the first game The information display device 59 is disposed closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 than the information display device 59. Therefore, it is possible to check the display state of the second game information display device 79 while visually recognizing the right-handed game ball.
  Specifically, the production space 40a provided inside the decorative frame 40, that is, a specific area where the game ball formed inside the game area 5a does not flow down (flow is restricted) and is adjacent to the decorative frame 40. It is provided to do. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the game area 5a does not collide with the second game information display device 79. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage that the second game information display device 79 is damaged due to the collision of the game balls.
  In addition, since the second game information display device 79 is disposed in the effect space 40a at a position off the motion trajectory of the movable effect member 73, even if the movable effect member 73 is operated, the second game information is displayed. The front of the display device 79 is not shielded and does not collide with the second game information display device 79. Therefore, the second game information display device 79 can be visually recognized regardless of the progress of the game. Note that the arrangement and structure of the second game information display device 79 of the present modification may be applied to the above-described embodiment.
  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), the second game information display device 79 includes a first special symbol second indicator 80, a second special symbol second indicator 81, and a normal symbol number. A second display 82, a right-handed second display 87, a first special symbol hold second indicator 83, a second special symbol hold second indicator 84, and a normal symbol hold second indicator. 85.
  The right-handed second display 87 is provided at the uppermost part of the second game information display device 79, and has a triangular window 4206 opened in the second cover member 5710 so that the tip is directed to the right area of the game area 5a. The lighting state of the LED can be visually recognized. As described above, since the second game information display device 79 is arranged at the most upstream in the flow direction of the game ball, it is easy for the player to find the right-handed second display 87. In addition, since the right-hand hitting is simply represented by the direction of the triangular window 4206, it is possible to easily grasp that the player hits the right-handing.
  The first special symbol second indicator 80 is provided on the left side immediately below the right-handed indicator 87, and visually recognizes the lighting state of the LED emitting green light from the circular window 4206 opened in the second cover member 5710. It is possible. In this way, the first special symbol second display 80 is left on the second game information display device 79, that is, the left region of the game region 5a in which the game ball is launched in the normal game state (the left-handed game ball is Since it is arranged on the side close to the area that flows down, it becomes easier for the player who is making a left strike to visually recognize the lighting state of the first special symbol second indicator 80.
  The second special symbol second indicator 81 is provided right below the right-handed indicator 87 (position closer to the right region of the game area 5a than the first special symbol first indicator 80), and has a second cover. A lighting state of an LED emitting red light can be visually recognized from a rectangular window 4206 opened in the member 5710. As described above, the second special symbol second display 81 is positioned on the right side of the first special symbol second indicator 80, that is, the right region (the right-handed game ball) of the game region 5a in which the game ball is launched in the short-time gaming state. Since it is arranged on the side close to the area where the spills down), it becomes easier for the player who is making a right strike to visually recognize the second lighting state of the second special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol second indicator 80 emits light with a different color, and the shape of the window 4206 is different, that is, the display mode (light emitting mode, visual mode) is different from that of the first special symbol second indicator 80. It becomes easy to distinguish the second special symbol second display 81.
  It should be noted that at least the effect design 70a (consisting of an identification unit and a decoration unit) that is variably displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. If it is the same gaming state, it is displayed in the same (common) display mode, but by checking the first special symbol second display 80 and the second special symbol second display 81, the first special symbol of It is possible to grasp whether the display is a variation display or a variation display of the second special symbol.
  The first special symbol holding second display 83 is provided immediately below the first special symbol second display 80 (), and emits green light from two rhombus windows 4206 opened in the second cover member 5710. It is possible to visually recognize the lighting state of the LED. In this way, light is emitted in the same color as the LED of the first special symbol second display 80 immediately below the first special symbol second display 80, that is, the display mode (light emitting mode, visual mode) is the same. It becomes easy for a person to grasp that it is the 1st reservation number.
  The second special symbol hold second indicator 84 is provided immediately below the second special symbol second indicator 81 (position closer to the right side region of the game area 5a than the first special symbol hold first indicator 83). In addition, the lighting state of the LED emitting green light can be visually recognized from the two hexagonal windows 4206 opened in the second cover member 5710. Thus, it is directly under the second special symbol second display 81 and emits light in the same color as the LED of the second special symbol second display 81, that is, the display mode (light emitting mode, visual mode) is the same, It becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number is the second pending number.
  The normal symbol second display 82 is provided on the lower left side of the second game information display device 79, and the lighting state of the LED emitting yellow light from the circular window 4206 opened in the second cover member 5710 is visually recognized. It is possible. In this way, the first special symbol second display 80 and the second special symbol second display 81 emit light in different colors, that is, the display mode (light emitting mode, visual mode) is different, so that the player has the first special symbol It becomes easy to distinguish from the symbol second display 80 and the second special symbol second indicator 81.
  The normal symbol hold second indicator 85 is provided on the right side of the normal symbol second indicator 82, and indicates the lighting state of the LED emitting yellow light from the two circular windows 4206 opened in the second cover member 5710. Visible. In this way, light is emitted in the same color as that of the normal symbol second display 82, that is, since the display mode (light emission mode, visual mode) is the same, it is easy for the player to grasp that the number of reserved symbols is normal.
  Although the first special symbol second indicator 80 and the second special symbol second indicator 81 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, they may be arranged apart from each other. The special symbol second indicator 80 is arranged closer to the left side area of the game area 5a than the second special symbol second indicator 81, and the second special symbol second indicator 81 is arranged from the first special symbol second indicator 80. May be arranged closer to the right area of the game area 5a. Further, the first special symbol second indicator 80 may be provided above the second special symbol second indicator 81 (upstream in the flow direction of the game ball), or vice versa.
  Further, the shape of the window 4206 of the first special symbol second indicator 80 and the shape of the window 4206 of the first special symbol reservation second indicator 83 are different, but they may be the same shape. Similarly, the shape of the window 4206 of the second special symbol second indicator 81 and the shape of the window 4206 of the second special symbol reservation second indicator 84 are different, but they may be the same shape.
  In addition, the shape of the window 4206 of the first special symbol second indicator 80 and the shape of the window 4206 of the normal symbol second indicator 82 are the same, but they may be different shapes. The shape of the window 4206 of the normal symbol second display 82 may be the same as or different from the shape of the window 4206 of the normal symbol holding second display 85.
  The second game information display device 79 includes a first special symbol second indicator 80, a second special symbol second indicator 81, a first special symbol hold second indicator 83, and a second special symbol hold second indicator. 84, the normal symbol second display 82, the normal symbol holding second indicator 85, and the right-handed second indicator 87 are provided, but only some of them may be provided. For example, the normal symbol holding second indicator 85 may not be provided, the right-handed second indicator 87 may not be provided, the first special symbol second indicator 80 and the second special indicator Other than the symbol second display 81 may be omitted.
  In addition, the second game information display device 79 (special symbol second indicators 80 and 81 and special symbol hold second indicators 83 and 84, etc.) is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. It may be provided at a position lower than the areas SH1 and SH2 and the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2, or may be provided at a position higher than the reserved number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2. Further, the second game information display device 79 may be provided at a position higher than one of the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2 and lower than the other.
  Further, the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2 provided in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 are arranged closer to the right area than the left area of the game area 5a. Also good. Even in that case, the second hold number display area SH2 may be arranged closer to the right area of the game area 5a than the first hold number display area SH1. Further, the first hold number display area SH1 may be disposed above (directly above) the second hold number display area SH2, or vice versa.
  In addition, the second special symbol display area DZ2 is not disposed below (including directly below) the first special symbol display area DZ1 provided in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, but the second special symbol display area is displayed. The first special symbol display area DZ1 may be arranged below (including immediately below) the area DZ2. Further, the second special symbol display area DZ2 may be arranged closer to the right area of the game area 5a than the first special symbol display area DZ1.
  Further, the reserved symbol display areas SH1 and SH2 are not arranged below the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2, but the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2 are arranged below the reserved number display areas SH1 and SH2. May be.
  In the present embodiment, the right-handed second display 87 has a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize than the right-handed first display 67 by marking “right-handed” in the vicinity of the LED. The display mode of the second hitting display 87 is not limited to this, and any display mode that is easier for the player to recognize than the right hitting first display 67 may be used. For example, it may be a blinking display instead of an LED lighting display, or may be lit in various colors at a predetermined interval using a full color LED, or larger than the LED of the right-handed first display 67. A size LED may be used. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to recognize than the right-handed first display 67.
  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is a special display mode 3 (red) that has a higher expectation level than the normal display mode (white) hold icon. Even if the hold icon is displayed, the special symbol hold second indicators 83 and 84 are displayed in the same display mode (LED lighting or flashing) as the normal display mode hold icon is displayed. However, the display of the special symbol hold second indicators 83 and 84 corresponding to the display mode of the hold icon of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 may be displayed in a special display mode. For example, the special symbol hold second indicators 83 and 84 are LEDs capable of full color display, and the special symbol hold second indicator corresponding to the hold icon of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is used. The display colors 83 and 84 may be changed.
  In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B1 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is used for the SP reach effect, the blackout effect, the movement effect and the jackpot game effect performed using the movable effect member 73. ˜70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the display of the change icon display area 70D have been deleted, but the display to be deleted is not limited to this. For example, the display of the special symbol hold number in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) may be deleted, or the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1). , The display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) or all of them may be deleted.
  As described above, even if the information related to the progress of the game is deleted, the information is displayed on the second game information display device 79. Therefore, the SP reach effect, the blackout effect, the movement effect and the jackpot performed using the movable effect member 73 The player can grasp information related to the progress of the game while preventing the game effect from being obstructed.
  In this embodiment, the display of the special symbol hold number at the time of power restoration after the occurrence of power interruption is substantially the same timing as the restoration of the display of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79. The display of the second game information display device 79 is restored after the display of the first game information display device 59 is restored, so that the first game information display device 59 → the second game information display device 79 → the first image. The display of the special symbol holding number may be restored in the order of the display device main liquid crystal) 70.
  In addition, when the power supply is restored after the occurrence of power interruption, the main CPU 110a transmits only the special symbol hold count and the general symbol hold count to the sub CPU 130a. Anyway.
  For example, information on whether the special symbol is changing or information on whether the normal symbol is changing may be transmitted. When these pieces of information are transmitted, even when the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is in the power recovery effect, the second game information display device 79 uses the special symbol second indicators 80 and 81 and the normal symbol second symbol. The display on the display 82 can be restored, and the player can grasp the fluctuation display of the special figure and the fluctuation display of the normal figure.
Further, game state information (at least information about whether or not the time-short game state) may be transmitted. In this way, even when the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is in the power recovery effect, the display of the right-handed second display 87 can be recovered in the second game information display device 79. The player can grasp the right-handed display.
For example, if the game is a big hit when the power is restored, if you do not make a right turn during the power restoration production, you will miss the opportunity to win a game ball in the big prize opening. By restoring the display of the device 87 so that the player can grasp the right-handed display, the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage.
  In the present embodiment, the player can adjust the brightness of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the frame illumination device 10, the panel illumination device 74, and the like. Although not configured, the gaming machine 1 can be configured to allow the player to adjust the brightness.
  For example, the cross key 19 is displayed during a customer waiting effect in which a customer waiting demonstration image or a power saving image is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. When the signal indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is input to the effect control unit 130m, the sub CPU 130a transmits a command corresponding to the operation to the image control unit 140.
  Then, the image control unit 140 displays the brightness adjustment image on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 based on the reception of the command from the effect control unit 130m. Take control.
If the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated while the brightness adjustment image is displayed, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 has been operated. In accordance with the operation of the cross key 19 from among several levels of brightness prepared in advance (for the left button, the brightness can be lowered from the currently set brightness and the right button can be used. For example, the luminance is set higher than the currently set luminance), and a luminance command corresponding to the selected luminance is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 160.
The sub CPU 130a corresponds to the brightness adjusting means of the present invention.
  The image control unit 140 changes the brightness of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 based on the brightness command from the effect control unit 130m and displays the brightness adjustment. Control is performed to update and display an image indicating that the luminance has been changed. Further, the lamp control unit 160 performs control to change the luminance of the panel lighting device 74 and the frame lighting device 10 based on the luminance command from the effect control unit 130m.
  In such a gaming machine 1, the cross key 19 is operated by the player, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the panel lighting device 74, and the frame lighting. Even if the luminance of the device 10 is changed, each display of the second game information display device 79 (first special symbol second display 80, second special symbol second display 81, normal symbol second display 82, The brightness of the LEDs of the first special symbol hold second indicator 83, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84, the normal symbol hold second indicator 85, and the right-handed second indicator 87) is not changed.
In this way, even if the player operates the cross key 19 to play a game with reduced brightness, each display of the second game information display device 79 (the first special symbol second display 80, the second display). Special symbol second indicator 81, normal symbol second indicator 82, first special symbol hold second indicator 83, second special symbol hold second indicator 84, normal symbol hold second indicator 85, and right The brightness of the LED of the second hitting display 87) is not changed and is displayed at a constant brightness, so that the player can grasp information regarding the progress of the game.
Each display of the first game information display device 59 (first special symbol first display 60, second special symbol first indicator 61, normal symbol first indicator 62, first special symbol hold first display LED 63, second special symbol hold first display 64, normal symbol hold first display 65, right-handed first display 67, high probability gaming state display 68, and short-time gaming state display 69) The brightness is not changed.
  In addition, each display of the second game information display device 79 (first special symbol second indicator 80, second special symbol second indicator 81, normal symbol second indicator 82, first special symbol hold second display) It is good also as a structure which can also change the brightness | luminance of LED of the indicator 83, the 2nd special symbol reservation 2nd display 84, the normal symbol reservation 2nd display 85, and the right-handed 2nd display 87). In this case, display control data corresponding to the luminance determined by the sub CPU 130a may be created and output to each display of the second game information display device 79.
  Further, the control method for adjusting the brightness is not limited to the above method. For example, only the command indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, and the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 160 store the currently set brightness, thereby providing the effect control. The brightness may be changed by referring to the currently set brightness stored based on the command from the unit 130m and determining the brightness to be changed.
  In the present embodiment, the LED is exemplified as means for displaying the game state information in the game information display device (display means). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a 7-segment display, an organic EL, and other light emitters are used. May be. In addition, as a light-emitting body, it is desirable from a viewpoint of compacting etc. that surface mounting is possible.
  The display substrate is not limited to a plate shape, and any display substrate may be used as long as the above-described light emitter as a means for displaying game state information is mounted. You can also.
  Further, in the modification of the first game information display device, the configuration in which the cover member is covered with the covering member is illustrated, but a covering member provided on the game board may be used as the cover member. Moreover, you may use a cover member also as a coating | coated member. A structure that covers at least the front side of the display substrate (light emitting means) and protects the display substrate (light emitting means), refers to both the covering member and the cover member, or one of the covering member and the cover member, and serves as the covering means. Can be caught.
  Moreover, in this embodiment, the example which provides the identification means which assists identification of the game state information displayed by the light emission state of LED corresponding to a 1st game information display apparatus or a 2nd game information display apparatus (display means) is provided. Although explained, it is not limited to this. For example, an information display unit may be provided that displays the above-described unique display, spec display, or the like that has a direct relationship with the game state information or is adjacent to or adjacent to the first game information display device or the second game information display device. The information display unit may cover the front side of the first game information display device and the second game information display device and the front side of the window. As described above, an information display unit may be provided instead of or in addition to the above-described mode of displaying the unique display or the specification display on the identification unit.
  Further, the identification means is not limited to be configured to identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs, and may be any configuration that assists in identifying the game state information. As an identification mode, an information auxiliary mode that makes it easy to grasp the meaning of the state of the LED by providing a label or the like corresponding to the LED, or a relationship between the first region that transmits light and the second region that hardly transmits light As described above, a discrimination assisting mode including a single unit or a combination thereof is included, such as a mode for easily discriminating (easily visually recognizing) the state of the LED. In particular, the information assisting mode can be distinguished and referred to as an information assisting unit, and the discrimination assisting mode can be distinguished and referred to as a discrimination assisting unit.
  Further, in the first game information display device and the second game information display device, the configuration arranged on the front side of the window is not limited to the identification means described above, and is arranged so as to cover the window, for example, through the window. It may be a protective measure to prevent fraud. For example, in addition to the identification means, a protective means made of a transparent light-transmitting sheet is provided on the cover member, the covering member, or the identification means itself, or the transparent means can transmit light instead of the identification means. Protective means made of a simple sheet can be provided on the cover member or the covering member.
  Further, the first game information display device and the second game information display device are connected to a control means such as a main control board and an effect control board, and according to a signal from the control means, individual or combination of a plurality of light emitters. According to the display mode, it can be said that information related to profits given to the player (special symbol, number of rounds of jackpot game: game state information) is displayed. Special design 1st display, special design 2nd display, normal design 1st display and normal design 2nd display (display means) turn on / off the plural light emitters with the predetermined pattern during the design change period. Repeatedly, immediately after the end of symbol variation or at a timing after a predetermined period, by turning on / off the light emitters corresponding to a predetermined pattern among the plurality of light emitters, display by individual light emitters, or multiple The combination display by the light emitters can be performed, and these displays can be performed in a plurality of patterns.
  In addition, the display mode displayed directly or indirectly (such as the above-mentioned identification means) by printing on the covering member, and each special symbol, the number of reserved storage, the number of rounds of jackpot game, etc. on the display (display means) By changing both or one of the arrangement and / or control, the display device (display means) may be shared by different models.
  Also, the first game information display device and the second game information display device are installed in the front and rear regions (glass side position) between the front surface (cell image position) of the game area of the game board and the height direction of the launch rail. If it can be seen through the glass placed on the front of the game board, it is within the game area (front and rear areas using the predetermined space of the prize opening and decoration frame), or the game area formation part (game balls flow down) It can be installed outside the gaming area (outside of the outer rail), which can form a possible gaming area (which can be rail or resin). Good.
  Specifically, for example, the gaming machine of the embodiment is configured as one type of pachinko gaming machine. Can be installed.
  In addition, as a display connected to the main control board for performing various lotteries, reel control, etc. in the spinning-type game machine, a display having the same configuration as the display of the above-described embodiment is provided. Information regarding the profits given to the player in the game with the swing type gaming machine may be displayed. Attach the back surface of the display board with the LED mounted on the front surface to the casing of the revolving game machine, etc., so that it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or leave a trace when disassembled. A cover member that covers the surface of the substrate may be provided. Then, the display device may display information related to the benefits given to the player in the game with the spinning-type game machine.
(Invention described in this specification)
By the way, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-096067), when a reach state occurs during execution of variation display, a part or all of a predetermined music piece is output as a sound output unit. From this, it is suggested whether or not the result of the variable display becomes a special result mode. However, in such a gaming machine, the number of songs output during the variation display is limited to one song, so the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state cannot be effectively raised, There was a problem that the entertainment of games was scarce.
As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special game whether or not to generate a special game (big hit game) state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition In the gaming machine that executes the determination (big win lottery) and generates the special gaming state based on the result of the special game determination, the variable display of the identification information (special symbol) for notifying the result of the special game determination is executed. And a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect (music preview effect) accompanied by the output of one or a plurality of music during the execution of the variable display, the specific effect executing means, The number of pieces of music output during execution of the specific effect is different depending on whether the expectation level at which the special game state is generated is low or high.
  By doing in this way, the player's expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.
  Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-152251), based on a determination result of whether or not a special gaming state occurs, a notice of changing the effect mode over a plurality of stages. The production mode is changed up to a stage corresponding to the degree of expectation that the special game state is generated. However, in such a gaming machine, the higher the degree of expectation that a special gaming state will occur, the easier the stage of the notice effect changes to the final stage, but this effectively increases the player's expectation for the notice effect. However, there was a problem that the interest of the game was poor.
As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the identification information (special symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the variation display result is the special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game (big hit game) state advantageous to the player when it is an aspect, a determination to determine whether or not to generate the special game state before the result of the variation display is derived And a specific effect executing means for executing a predetermined specific effect (acquired challenge effect) based on the determination result of the determining means, and a predetermined for notifying that the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. A notice effect execution means for executing the notice effect (step-up notice effect 1), and the predetermined notice effect is a notice effect that can change the effect mode over a plurality of stages. The plurality of stages includes a first stage, a second stage subsequent to the first stage, and a final stage subsequent to the second stage. The second stage effect is executed over a longer time than the first stage effect and the final stage effect.
  By doing in this way, a player's expectation with respect to a notice effect can be raised effectively, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.
In addition, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-152251), an effect mode is changed over a plurality of stages based on a determination result of whether or not a special gaming state occurs. The presentation mode is changed up to the stage corresponding to the expectation level at which the special gaming state occurs in the notice effect. However, in such a gaming machine, the final stage number is common despite the fact that there are multiple types of notice effects, so the number of stages expected by the player is constant no matter which notice effect is executed. In the end, there was a problem that there was little interest in the notice production.
As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the identification information (special symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the variation display result is the special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game (big hit game) state advantageous to the player when it comes to a mode, a specific variation for executing a specific variation display for performing a specific effect (acquired challenge effect) after a lapse of a predetermined period from the start of the variation display Display execution means, and notice effect execution means for executing any of a plurality of types of notice effects (step-up notice effects 1 to 3) for notifying that the specific effect is executed during the specific variation display. The plurality of types of notice effects are notice effects that can change the effect manner over a plurality of stages, and the first notice effect (step-up notice effect with the final number of stages set to the first number of stages). ) And a second notice effect (step-up notice effect 2 or 3) set to a second number of stages whose number of final stages is greater than the first number of stages, Even when the type of the notice effect is executed up to the final number of stages, the notice effect is executed up to the final number of stages between the start of the specific variation display and the execution of the specific effect. ing.
  By doing in this way, a player's expectation with respect to a notice effect can be raised effectively, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.
  Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP2013-208143A), in the effect display unit in order to notify the player of the number stored for the special game lottery. The pending number was displayed. However, in a recent gaming machine, the effect agent device is enlarged, and when it is movable, the effect display unit is covered and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the reserved number, or a specific effect image is displayed on the effect display unit. In some cases, the display of the hold number may be erased. In these cases, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the hold number.
As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information acquiring means for acquiring start information when the start condition is satisfied, and the start information acquiring means After acquiring the starting information by the above, when a determination condition is satisfied, a special game determination (bonus lottery) as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (bonus game) based on the starting information The main control means (main control board 110) having special game determination means for performing the game, and on the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70) based on the control information from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising sub-control means (production control board 130) for executing the above, the main control means, when the start condition is satisfied but the determination condition is not satisfied, The first hold storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of the start information acquired by the dynamic information acquisition means as the hold storage, and the number of the hold memories stored in the first hold storage means as the hold storage number information A holding memory number information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-control means, and displays a holding display corresponding to the number of the holding memories stored in the first holding storage means (first symbol holding device). 1 display 63, 64), the sub-control means, the second hold storage means for storing the number of the hold memory indicated by the hold memory number information transmitted by the hold memory number information transmission means, Is provided on the second on-hold display device (special symbol on-hold second display 83, 84) and the image display device corresponding to the number of the on-hold storage stored in the second on-hold storage means. It had to allow shown.
As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information acquiring means for acquiring start information when the start condition is satisfied, and the start information acquiring means After acquiring the starting information by the above, when a determination condition is satisfied, a special game determination (bonus lottery) as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (bonus game) based on the starting information Main control means (main control board 110) having a special game determination means for performing, and sub-control means (effect control board 130) for executing a varying effect in the image display device based on control information from the main control means. When the start condition is satisfied but the determination condition is not satisfied, the main control means includes the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means. First hold storage means for storing information as a hold storage up to a predetermined number, and the number of hold storages stored in the first hold storage means to be sent to the sub-control means as the hold storage number information Transmitting means, and displaying a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold memories stored in the first hold storage means on the first hold display device (special symbol hold first display 63, 64). The sub-control means further comprises second hold storage means for storing the number of the hold memories indicated by the hold memory number information transmitted by the hold memory number information sending means, and the second hold storage means The second hold display device (special symbol hold second display 83, 84) and the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70) corresponding to the number of the hold memories stored in the second hold display device In In the hold display displayed on the image display device, the first form (first hold icons H11 to H14, second hold icons H21 to H24) displayed with a hold icon and the second form displayed with a numerical value (Holding number display (first holding number display, second holding number display) displayed in the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2)) The suggestion effect that suggests the determination result of the special game determination can be executed, and a specific suggestion effect (for example, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, a blackout effect, and a movable effect member 73 predetermined in the variation effect). When the specific suggestion effect is being performed, the hold display of the first aspect displayed on the image display device is deleted. I was allowed to leave.
  By adopting the first configuration or the second configuration, it is possible to grasp the reserved number.
  In addition, in conventional gaming machines (for example, gaming machines described in JP2013-208143A), as the game progresses, a variation display of a design symbol for notifying a lottery result of a special game, a display of the number of holds, etc. (Hereinafter, referred to as “predetermined information regarding the progress of the game”) and the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game are displayed on the effect display unit in order to notify the player. However, in a recent gaming machine, the effect agent device is enlarged, and when it is movable, the effect display unit is covered and predetermined information regarding the progress of the game becomes difficult to visually recognize, or a specific effect image is displayed in the effect display unit. In some cases, the display of the predetermined information related to the progress of the game may be erased. In these cases, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the predetermined information related to the progress of the game.
As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information acquiring means for acquiring start information when the start condition is satisfied, and the start information acquiring means After obtaining the starting information, the special game determination (bonus lottery) on whether or not to execute a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player based on the starting information is triggered when the determination condition is satisfied A main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub control means (effect control board) for effect control based on control information from the main control means. 130), and the main control means causes the first game information display device (first game information display device 59) to display predetermined information relating to the progress of the game, and the sub-control means includes the control information Based on and so as to display a predetermined information on the progress of the game in the second game information display device (second game information display unit 79) and an image display apparatus (first image display device (main LCD) 70).
In addition, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game machine 1 further includes a luminance adjusting unit (sub CPU 130a) for adjusting the luminance of the display device, and the luminance adjusting unit adjusts the luminance of the image display device. 2. The brightness of the game information display device is not adjusted.
As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start condition is established in the gaming machine in which the player plays a game by launching a gaming medium into the gaming area. Triggered by the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, and a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means A main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, including a special game determination means for performing a (big hit lottery), and a sub-control for effect control based on control information from the main control means Means (effect control board 130), wherein the main control means causes the first game information display device (first game information display device 59) to display predetermined information relating to the progress of the game, and Based on the control information, the game control means displays predetermined information relating to the progress of the game in a second game information display device (second game information display device 79) and an image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70). The second game information display device is provided in the game area and forms a part of the passage route of the game medium.
As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information acquiring means for acquiring start information when the start condition is satisfied, and the start information acquiring means Control of the progress of the game, comprising special game determination means for performing a special game determination (bonus lottery) as to whether or not to execute a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player based on the start information acquired by Main control means (main control board 110), and sub-control means (effect control board 130) for controlling effects based on control information from the main control means, wherein the main control means Predetermined information related to the progress is displayed on the first game information display device (first game information display device 59), and the sub-control means displays the predetermined information related to the progress of the game on the second game based on the control information. The information is displayed on an information display device (second game information display device 79) and an image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70), and the second game information display device is compared with the first game information display device. In the vicinity of the image display device.
  By adopting these first to third configurations, it becomes possible to grasp predetermined information regarding the progress of the game.
  In addition, in conventional gaming machines (for example, gaming machines described in JP2013-208143A), as the game progresses, a variation display of a design symbol for notifying a lottery result of a special game, a display of the number of holds, etc. (Hereinafter, referred to as “predetermined information regarding the progress of the game”) and the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game are displayed on the effect display unit in order to notify the player. By the way, when a power failure occurs in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-123507), a power failure recovery screen indicating that recovery from the power failure is in progress is displayed at the time of subsequent power failure recovery. It was displayed on the device (effect display section). However, this power failure recovery screen usually only displays “Recovering power failure”. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game during the recovery from the power failure.
As a configuration for solving the above-described problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the start condition is established, start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, and start information by the start information acquisition means Special game that performs special game determination (big win lottery) as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the start information when the determination condition is satisfied A main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control means (effect control board 130) that controls the production based on the control information from the main control means; In the gaming machine having the above, the progress of the game when the predetermined level value is detected based on the detection that the power supplied to the gaming machine has become a predetermined level value lower than the normal value. When the game machine is activated, information relating to the progress control of the game is stored in the gaming state storage means when the gaming machine is activated. Is further provided with game state recovery means for performing recovery processing for recovering the game state when the predetermined level value is detected based on the stored information relating to the progress control of the game, and the main control means Causes the first game information display device (first game information display device 59) to display predetermined information related to the progress of the game, and the sub-control unit displays the predetermined information related to the progress of the game based on the control information. 2 game information display device (second game information display device 79) and image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70) to display the game state When the restoration process by the old means is performed, the display of the predetermined information related to the progress of the game is displayed on the display of the second game information display device earlier than the display of the image display device. It was.
  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain the predetermined information regarding progress of a game.
  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-33792), after a special game, the gaming state shifts to a high frequency support mode (time-short gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, The special game or high-frequency support mode is configured to aim at the right side of the game area with a so-called right-hand hit. Display was in progress. However, in the recent gaming machines, the effect agent device is enlarged, and when the effect display unit is covered when it is movable and the right-handed display becomes difficult to visually recognize, or when a specific effect image is displayed on the effect display device May erase the right-handed display. In these cases, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp the right-handed display.
As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal gaming state (non-short-time gaming state) or the advantageous gaming state (time-short gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, In a gaming machine controlled to any one of the jackpot gaming states), the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and the control information from the main control means Sub-control means (effect control board 130) for performing control, a game area where the game medium flows down, and game medium launching means for launching the game medium in the game area in response to a player's operation, The game area includes a first game area (left game area) in which the game medium is to be fired when controlled in the normal game state, and the game when controlled in the advantageous game state. A second game area (right game area) that is a region where the body is to be fired, and the main control means moves toward the second game area when controlled to the advantageous game state. A display for notifying that the medium should be fired is displayed on the first display device (right-handed first display 67), and the sub-control means controls the second game when controlled to the advantageous gaming state. A display for notifying that the game medium should be launched toward the area is displayed on the second display device (right-handed second display 87) and the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70). The display on the second display device is more easily recognized by the player than the display on the first display device, and the display on the image display device is more on the player than the display on the second display device. It was made to display so that it can be easily recognized.
  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to grasp the right-handed display.
  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP2013-099682A), a gaming machine including a special symbol display provided with a plurality of LEDs is known. In such a gaming machine, the lighting pattern of the LED of the special symbol display corresponding to each type of jackpot is made irregular to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred from the display content of the special symbol display. It has been proposed to make it difficult. However, conventionally, in the special symbol display, the LED is attached to the substrate by through-hole mounting in which a terminal is inserted into a hole formed in the substrate and soldered. For this reason, it is possible to remove the LED from the board and attach it again to the board, and there is a risk that the interest of the game will be impaired by becoming an object of fraud.
As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200), a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and a front side of the cover member (4202), Identification means (4220) capable of identifying the light emission modes of a plurality of LEDs (4045) individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more of the LEDs (4045), and the cover member (4202) includes the cover member And the window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined as the window (4206). A window defining part (4212) configured to be distinguishable every time, and the identification means (4220) is provided on the front side of the window (4206), and is capable of transmitting or affecting the light transmitted therethrough. The first region (4222, 5126, 5132) to be provided and the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) are provided around the first region (4222, 5126, 5132). 132) is displayed in the second region (4224, 5128, 5134), which is less likely to transmit light than the second region (4224, 5128, 5134), and the light emission modes of two or more LEDs (4045) are combined. The display means (59) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200) from the cover member (4202), the display substrate (4200) and the cover member. (4202) is difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, the cover member (4202) and the display substrate (4200) are configured to leave traces of removal. It is characterized by.
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted. The cover member (4202) A window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined while penetrating the material (4202) back and forth, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined for each window. The cover member (4202) has a window defining portion (4212) configured to be distinguishable, and the cover member (4202) is a rear side of the covering member (4800) that fills the front and rear regions of the game board (5) of the gaming machine (1). It is attached to the covering member (4800), and the front side of the cover member (4202) surrounds a first region (4222, 5126, 5132) arranged on the front side of the window (4206). The second region (4224, 5128, 5134) which is difficult to transmit light is provided, and the LED corresponding to the window (4206) through the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) 4045) is provided with identification means (4220, 5120), the display means (59) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200) from the cover member (4202), and the display substrate ( 4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200) has a trace of removal. It is characterized by being configured to remain.
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted. The cover member (4202) The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined while penetrating the material (4202) back and forth, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined as the window (4206). ) Having a window defining portion (4212) configured to be distinguishable from each other, and the display substrate (4200) has a front surface of the display substrate (4200) and a peripheral surface of the display substrate (4200) as the cover member. A protective member (4204) housed inside (4202) and covering the rear surface of the display substrate (4200) housed in the cover member (4202) is the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200). The display means (59) is configured such that the display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display substrate (4200) and the front It is difficult to reassemble with the cover member (4202), or when the display means (59) is disassembled, the cover member (4202) and the display substrate (4200) are configured to leave a trace of removal. It is characterized by that.
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted. The cover member (4202) The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined while penetrating the material (4202) back and forth, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined as the window (4206). ) Each having a window defining portion (4212) configured to be distinguishable, and the cover member (4202) is arranged so that the window defining portion (4212) faces the front surface of the display substrate (4200). The window member (4212) individually surrounds the entire periphery of the LED (4045) combined with the display substrate (4200) and mounted on the front surface of the display substrate (4200), and the cover member (4202). Identification means (4220, 5120) attached to the front surface so as to cover the window (4206) and capable of identifying the light emission mode of the LED (4045) for each window (4206) And the identification means (4220, 5120) includes a first layer (4230, 5130, 5136) that easily transmits light, and a front side of the cover member (4202) other than the window (4206). A second layer (4232, 5131, 5138) disposed on the layer (4230, 5130, 5136) and less transmitting light than the first layer (4230, 5130, 5136). The means (59) is configured such that the display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display substrate (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or the display means ( 59), when removing the cover 59, the cover member 4202 and the display substrate 4200 are left with a trace of removal.
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted. The cover member (4202) The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined while penetrating the material (4202) back and forth, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined as the window (4206). ) Having a window defining part (4212) configured to be distinguishable for each, and is replaceably attached to the gaming board (5) of the gaming machine (1) to fill the front and rear areas on the front side of the gaming board (5). The covering member (4800) covers the front side of the cover member (4202), is provided on the covering member (4800) and is positioned on the front side of the cover member (4202), and the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (4045) And identifying means (4220, 5120) that can identify the light emitting mode of the LED (4045) individually or as a combination of two or more LEDs, and the display means (59) is the display substrate. 4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display substrate (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, the cover member ( 4202) and the display substrate (4200) so that traces of removal remain.
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted. The cover member (4202) The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined while penetrating the material (4202) back and forth, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined as the window (4206). ) Having a window defining part (4212) configured to be distinguishable from each other and attached to the gaming board (5) of the gaming machine (1) to cover the gaming board (5 front side front and rear region (4800 ) To cover the front side of the cover member (4202), and the covering member (4800) is positioned on the front side of the cover member (4202) and attached to the front surface of the covering member (4800). Identification means (4220, 5120) capable of identifying the light emission mode of 4045) individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs (4045), and the covering member (48) 0) and a protective part (4808) covering the peripheral surface of the identification means (4220, 5120) attached to the front surface of the covering member (4800), the display means (59) The display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display substrate (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or the display means (59) is disassembled. At this time, it is configured such that a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200).
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted. The cover member (4202) The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined while penetrating the material (4202) back and forth, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined as the window (4206). ) Having a window defining part (4212) configured to be distinguishable for each, and a covering member attached to the game board (5) of the gaming machine (1) and filling the front and rear areas on the front side of the game board (5) 4800) covers the front side of the cover member (4202), the first identification part (5122) provided on the front surface of the cover member (4202), and the second identification part (4800) provided on the covering member (4800). 5124) can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs (4045) individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs (4045). In the display means (59), the display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), and the display substrate (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble. Alternatively, when the display means (59) is disassembled, it is configured such that a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200).
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted. The cover member (4202) The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined while penetrating the material (4202) back and forth, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined as the window (4206). ) Having a window defining part (4212) configured to be distinguishable from each other, and on the front surface of the cover member (4202), according to the shape of the region in which the window (4206) on the front surface of the cover member (4202) opens. The formed identification means (4220, 5120) is attached, and the identification means (4220, 5120) surrounds the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) disposed on the front side of the window (4206), A second region (4224, 5128, 5134) that is difficult to transmit light is provided and the window (via the first region (4222, 5126, 5132)). 4206) can identify the state of the LED (4045), the display means (59) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200) from the cover member (4202), and the display substrate (4200). ) And the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200). It is configured as described above.
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200), a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the display member housed in the cover member (4202) A protective member (4204) that covers the rear surface of the plate (4200), and the cover member (4202) penetrates the cover member (4202) back and forth and is formed in correspondence with the LED (4045) (4206) and a window defining portion (4212) configured to distinguish the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) for each window (4206), and the cover member ( 4202) and the protective member (4204) include an engaging portion (4214) provided on one of the cover member (4202) and the protective member (4204), and the cover member (4202) and the protective member (4204). ) And the engagement receiving portion (4216) provided on the other side, the cover member (when it is difficult to remove, reassemble or disassemble from each other) 202) and characterized by being configured to as traces of removal remains one of the protective member (4204).
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted. The cover member (4202) A window (4206) formed through the member (4202) in the front-rear direction and corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined as the window (4206). ) And a window defining portion (4212) configured to be distinguishable from each other, and the window defining portion (4212) facing the front surface of the display substrate (4200) so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface. The display substrate (4200) is integrally formed with the portion (4212) and is fitted into the substrate hole (4400) formed in the display substrate (4200). The display means (59), the display substrate (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), and the display substrate (42). 0) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200) has a trace of removal. It is characterized by being configured to remain.
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200), a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and surface-mounted on the display substrate (4200), Current limiting means (4500) for controlling the current supplied to the plurality of LEDs (4045), and the cover member (4202) penetrates the cover member (4202) back and forth and the LED ( 4045) is divided into windows (4206), and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is configured to be distinguishable for each window (4206) ( 4212), the display means (59) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200) from the cover member (4202), and the display substrate (4200) and the cover member (4202) are reassembled. It is difficult or when the display means (59) is disassembled, it is configured such that a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200). Characterized in that was.
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110). In accordance with a signal from the main control means (110), a special symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved memories for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol Display means (59) that displays any one of the LEDs by means of LEDs (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) covering the front surface of the display substrate (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted. The cover member (4202) A window (4206) formed through the member (4202) in the front-rear direction and corresponding to the LED (4045) is defined, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is defined as the window (4206). ) Having a window defining part (4212) configured to be distinguishable from each other, and the main control means (110) is supplied to the plurality of LEDs (4045) surface-mounted on the display substrate (4200). Current display means (4500, 4500) for controlling the current to be generated, the display means (59) is difficult to remove the display substrate (4200) from the cover member (4202), and the display substrate ( 4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, the cover member (4202) and the display substrate (4200). Characterized either by being configured as a trace of removal remains in the.
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player, the special machine Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a game; and a display unit (first game information display device) capable of displaying a state related to the state of the game based on the determination; And a display substrate (first display substrate) on which an LED for performing the status display is surface-mounted, and a cover member (first cover member) that accommodates the display substrate. And an identification means (sheet) that includes a window defining portion that defines a window that allows the LED to be visually recognized, covers the front side of the window, and that can identify the state of the LED corresponding to the window. And the display substrate includes the cover. Characterized by being configured to be accommodated in the cover member so difficult detachable from member.
  By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player, A first display unit (first game information display device) capable of performing state display (variation display, hold display, right-handed display) related to the state, and performing the state display separately from the first display unit A second display unit (second game information display device) capable of displaying, the first display unit has a first display substrate on which an LED for performing the state display is surface-mounted, and the first display unit A first cover member that accommodates a display substrate, the first cover member having a window defining portion that defines a window that allows the LED to be visually recognized, and covers a front side of the window. And an identification hand that can identify the state of the LED corresponding to the window. (Sheet), the first display substrate is accommodated in the first cover member so as to be difficult to attach and detach from the first cover member, and the second display unit includes an LED for performing the status display. And a second cover member provided on a front surface of the second display substrate, wherein the first display unit and the second display unit are different from each other (right-handed). The state display is performed by a different notation, lighting / flashing mode, and number of LEDs).
  In this way, the player can grasp information related to the game.
  Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-208143), when a game ball enters the starting area, a random number for lottery as to whether or not to win a special game is stored as a hold. When a preset start condition is satisfied, the hold is read and a special game lottery is performed. When the special game is won by the special game lottery, the special game is executed. Furthermore, based on the lottery result of the special game, an effect image composed of various moving images and still images is displayed on the effect display unit, or the effect agent device is moved to excite the player's game Has become mainstream. In addition, in order to notify the player of information related to the game, information related to the game is displayed on the effect display unit. By the way, in the recent gaming machines, the production equipment device is enlarged, and when it is movable, the production display unit may be covered and it may be difficult to visually recognize information about the game. There was a problem that it was difficult to grasp.
As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information from the main control means In a gaming machine provided with sub-control means (sub-control board) for controlling the production based on the above, the main control means is based on the determination information (special drawing determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (bonus game) advantageous to a player, variation display means for performing variation display in a variation display area based on the determination result, and determination is not performed A storage means for storing the determination information as a hold memory, a pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game, and a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold memories are displayed in a first hold display area (special symbol). on hold A first hold display means to be displayed on the one display), and the display result displayed in the variable display area includes one type of losing display result in which the special game is not executed and the special game is executed. A plurality of types of special display results, and the sub-control means displays a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold displays displayed in the first hold display area in a second hold display area (special symbol hold second display). And second hold display means for displaying in a third hold display area (first image display device) that is easier to visually recognize than the second hold display area, and based on the result of the prior determination, 2 holding change means for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed by the 2 hold display means, the hold changing means does not change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the second hold display area, The third hold Hold display of the display mode displayed on the display region is characterized by changing.
  In this way, the player can grasp information related to the game.
As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player, acquisition conditions Storage means (main control board) for storing the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired as a result of the establishment as hold storage, and determination means (main control board) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information Control board), fluctuation display means (main control board) for performing fluctuation display in a fluctuation display area (special symbol first display) based on the result of the determination, and whether to execute the special game in advance Based on the result of the prior determination means (main control board), the hold display means (main control board, production control board) for displaying the hold display corresponding to the number of the hold memories in the hold display area, Change the display mode of the hold display Holding change means (production control board) for causing the hold display area to be a first hold display area (special symbol hold first display) and a second hold display area (special symbol hold second display). And a third hold display area (first image display device) in which the hold display is easier to visually recognize than the first hold display area and the second hold display area. The specific display corresponding to the variable display (display of the variable icon) is not performed in the second hold display area, but the specific display is performed in the third hold display area, and the hold changing means is configured to display the first hold. The display mode of the hold display displayed in the display area and the second hold display area is not changed, but the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area is changed.
  In this way, the player can grasp information related to the game.
As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player, The first start area (first start port) and the second start area (second start port) provided in the game area where can flow down, and determination information (special figure) acquired by entering the first start area Storage means (main control board) for storing determination information) as first hold memory and storing determination information (special drawing determination information) acquired by entering the second starting area as second hold memory And determining means (main control board) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and variable display in a first variable display area (special symbol first display) based on the determination result First variation display means (main control board) for performing the first and the first Second variation display means (production control board) for performing variation display in the second variation display region (special symbol second display) so as to correspond to variation display in the dynamic display region, and whether or not to execute the special game Predetermining means (main control board) for predetermining whether or not, hold display means (main control board, production control board) for displaying a hold display according to the number of the hold memories in the hold display area, and the prior determination And a holding change means (effect control board) that changes the display mode of the holding display based on the result of the above, and the first changing display corresponding to the first holding storage is performed in the second changing display area. A first variation display display area (first special symbol second display) and a second variation display display region (second special symbol second display) in which a second variation display corresponding to the second reserved storage is performed. In the display area for the first variation display The first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display in the second fluctuation display display area can be distinguished, and the hold display area includes a first hold display area (special symbol hold first display), A second reserved display area (special symbol reserved second display), and a third reserved display area (first image display device) that is more easily visible than the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area. The hold changing means does not change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first hold display area and the second hold display area, but is displayed in the third hold display area. The display mode of the hold display is changed.
  In this way, the player can grasp information related to the game.
As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (bonus game) advantageous to the player, A memory for storing a start area (first start port, second start port) provided in a game area where the player can flow down and determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by entering the start area as a hold memory Means (main control board), determination means (main control board) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a first variation display area (special symbol first) based on the result of the determination The first fluctuation display means (main control board) for performing fluctuation display on the display) and the second fluctuation display area (special symbol second display) so as to correspond to the fluctuation display in the first fluctuation display area Second variation display means for performing display (production control board) Predetermining means (main control board) for predetermining whether or not to execute the special game, and hold display means (main control board, effect) for displaying a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold memories in the hold display area Control board), and a holding change means (effect control board) for changing the display mode of the holding display based on the result of the prior determination, the first variable display area (special symbol first display), The aspect (size, number of LEDs, shape) of the second variable display area (special symbol second display) is changed, and the hold display area is the first hold display area (special symbol hold first indicator). And a second hold display area (a special symbol hold second display), and a third hold display area (first image display) in which the hold display is easier to visually recognize than the first hold display area and the second hold display area. Device), and the hold changing means The display mode of the hold display displayed in the first hold display area and the second hold display area is not changed, but the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area is changed. .
  In this way, the player can grasp information related to the game.
◇ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, A memory for storing a start area (first start port, second start port) provided in a game area where the player can flow down and determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by entering the start area as a hold memory Means (main control board), determination means (main control board) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a first variation display area (special symbol first) based on the result of the determination A first variation display means (main control board) for displaying the variation of the symbol on the display), and a second variation display region (special symbol second indicator) so as to correspond to the variation display in the first variation display region. The second variation display means (display) Control board), third variation display means for performing a variation effect accompanied by symbol variation display in the third variation display area (first image display device) based on the result of the determination, and whether or not to execute the special game Pre-determining means (main control board) for pre-determining, hold display means (main control board, production control board) for displaying a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold memories in the hold display area, Holding change means (effect control board) for changing the display mode of the hold display based on the result, and when the specified effect (SP reach or the like) is executed in the change effect, the second change display area Although the size of the displayed symbol does not change, the size of the symbol displayed in the third variable display region changes, and the hold display region is a first hold display region (special symbol hold first display). And second hold display area (special A design hold second display), and a first hold display area and a third hold display area (first image display device) in which the hold display is easier to visually recognize than the second hold display area, The hold changing means does not change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first hold display area and the second hold display area, but the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area is It is characterized by changing.
  In this way, the player can grasp information related to the game.
As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) for controlling the progress of the game, and control information from the main control means And a sub control means (sub control board) for controlling the production based on the game machine, the main control means is acquired by entering a start area provided in a game area where game balls can flow down. Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) based on the determined determination information, and a first variation display area (special symbol first display) based on the determination result A first variation display means for performing a variable display in the storage, a storage means for storing the determination information that has not been determined as a pending storage, a prior determination means for determining in advance whether or not to execute the special game, To the number of pending storage First holding display means for displaying a corresponding holding display on a first holding display area (special symbol holding first display), and the starting area includes a first downflow area (left side area) of the gaming area. A first start area (first start port) in which a game ball that flows down can enter and a second start area (second area) in which a game ball flowing down the second flow area (right side area) of the game area can enter. The sub-control means is a second fluctuation display means for performing fluctuation display in a second fluctuation display area (special symbol second indicator) based on the result of the determination, and the first hold A hold display corresponding to the number of the hold displays displayed in the display area is a second hold display area (special symbol hold second display), and a third hold display area that is easier to visually recognize than the second hold display area. The second hold display means to be displayed on the (image display device) and the result of the prior determination. And a holding change means for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed by the second hold display means, and the second variable display area is a first change based on a ball entering the first start area. A first variation display display area (first special symbol second display) in which one variation display is performed, and a second variation display display area in which a second variation display is performed based on entering the second start area. (The second special symbol second display), and the second variation display display area is arranged closer to the second downstream area than the first downstream area, The display mode of the hold display displayed in the second hold display area is not changed, but the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area is changed.
  Further, in a gaming machine comprising a main control means (main control board) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub control means (sub control board) for controlling the production based on control information from the main control means, Whether or not the main control means executes a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired by entering the starting area provided in the gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down The first variation display means for performing variation display in the first variation display area (special symbol first display) based on the determination result, and the determination information for which the determination has not been performed is suspended. Storage means for storing as memory, pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to execute the special game, and a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold memories are displayed in a first hold display area (special symbol hold first indicator) ) First start display means, and the start area includes a first start area (first start port) into which a game ball flowing down the first flow area (left area) of the game area can enter, A second starting area (second starting port) in which a game ball flowing down the second flowing area (right area) of the gaming area can enter, and the sub-control means is based on the result of the determination A second variation display means for performing variation display in a second variation display area (special symbol second display), and a second suspension display corresponding to the number of the suspension displays displayed in the first suspension display area. A second hold display means for displaying in a region (special symbol hold second display), a third hold display region (image display device) that is easier to visually recognize than the second hold display region, and the result of the prior determination Based on the display state of the hold display displayed by the second hold display means Holding change means for changing the first change display area (first special symbol display area) in which the first change display is performed on the first start display area. 2 display), and a second variation display display area (second special symbol second display) in which a second variation display based on entering the second starting region is performed, and the second The display area for fluctuation display is arranged closer to the second downstream area than the display area for first fluctuation display, and the hold change means has a display mode of the hold display displayed in the second hold display area. Although not changed, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area is changed.
  In this way, the player can grasp information related to the game.
  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a spinning-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for Jiyan ball game machines and arrange ball game machines.
  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.
1 gaming machine 5 game board 43 general winning opening 43a general winning opening detection switch 44 universal gate 44a gate detection switch 45 first start opening 45a first start opening detection switch 47 second start opening 47a second start opening detection switch 50 large Winning port 50a Large winning port detection switch 70 First image display device (main liquid crystal)
71 Second image display device (sub liquid crystal)
110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110b Main ROM
110c Main RAM
120 Discharge control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU
130b Sub ROM
130c Sub RAM

Claims (1)

  1. Acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on establishment of a start condition;
    Storage means for storing the determination information acquired by the acquisition means;
    Determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information;
    Pre-determining means for pre-determining whether or not to perform the special game;
    First variation display means for performing first symbol variation display on the first display unit based on the result of the determination;
    A second variation display means for performing a second symbol variation display on the second display unit so as to correspond to the first symbol variation display;
    A third variation display means for performing a third symbol variation display on the third display unit based on the result of the determination;
    A hold display means for performing a hold display according to the number of the determination information stored in the storage means;
    Display changing means capable of changing the display mode of the hold display based on the result of the prior determination,
    The first variation display means is provided in a main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
    The second variation display means is provided in an effect control means for producing an effect according to a command from the main control means, and a predetermined command transmitted from the main control means when the first symbol variation display is started. In response to the reception of the second symbol variation display,
    The symbol size in the second symbol variation display does not change, but the symbol size in the third symbol variation display can be changed,
    The hold display has a first display area that does not overlap even when the movable effect member operates, a second display area that does not overlap even when the movable effect member operates, and at least a portion that overlaps when the movable effect member operates. Performed in each of the third display areas,
    The display mode of the hold display displayed in the first display area and the second display area does not change, but the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third display area is changeable,
    The first display unit performs the first symbol variation display by changing the lighting positions of the plurality of LEDs, and the second display unit blinks one LED to perform the second symbol variation display.
    The LED lighting position change period in the first symbol variation display on the first display portion and the LED lighting cycle in the second symbol variation display on the second display portion are different,
    The hold display means includes
    When the power supply stopped when the hold display is performed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped, the first display area and the second display area are more than the third display area. A gaming machine, wherein the display area performs the hold display first.
JP2016173807A 2016-09-06 2016-09-06 Game machine Active JP6621723B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016173807A JP6621723B2 (en) 2016-09-06 2016-09-06 Game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016173807A JP6621723B2 (en) 2016-09-06 2016-09-06 Game machine

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2018038536A JP2018038536A (en) 2018-03-15
JP2018038536A5 JP2018038536A5 (en) 2018-08-02
JP6621723B2 true JP6621723B2 (en) 2019-12-18

Family

ID=61623966

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2016173807A Active JP6621723B2 (en) 2016-09-06 2016-09-06 Game machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6621723B2 (en)

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5661869B2 (en) * 2013-06-28 2015-01-28 株式会社大都技研 Amusement stand
JP6302402B2 (en) * 2014-12-25 2018-03-28 株式会社三共 Game machine

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2018038536A (en) 2018-03-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6343644B2 (en) Game machine
JP6145472B2 (en) Game machine
JP5313035B2 (en) Game machine
JP5994174B2 (en) Amusement stand
JP5200275B2 (en) Amusement stand
JP5055681B2 (en) Game machine
JP2007020941A (en) Game machine
JP2005081024A (en) Game machine
JP2005081024A5 (en)
JP6280889B2 (en) Game machine
JP2006025835A (en) Game machine
JP6046184B2 (en) Game machine
JP2008109991A (en) Game machine
JP2006288849A (en) Game machine
JP6129542B2 (en) Game machine
JP6289531B2 (en) Game machine
JP6186399B2 (en) Game machine
JP5044970B2 (en) Game machine
JP5122530B2 (en) Game machine
JP2006043356A (en) Game machine
JP5753876B2 (en) Game machine
JP2013212254A (en) Game machine
JP4678148B2 (en) Game machine
JP2018166815A (en) Game machine
JP5852990B2 (en) Game machine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A621 Written request for application examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A621

Effective date: 20180622

A521 Written amendment

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20180622

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20190212

A977 Report on retrieval

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A971007

Effective date: 20190213

A521 Written amendment

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20190402

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20190423

A521 Written amendment

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20190612

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20190917

A521 Written amendment

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20191001

TRDD Decision of grant or rejection written
A01 Written decision to grant a patent or to grant a registration (utility model)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A01

Effective date: 20191025

A61 First payment of annual fees (during grant procedure)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A61

Effective date: 20191120

R150 Certificate of patent or registration of utility model

Ref document number: 6621723

Country of ref document: JP

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150